HP Hewlett Packard CD Player C4381 90100 User Manual

HP Su r eSt or e  
CD-W r it er P lu s  
User s Gu id e  
for you r ext er n a l d r ive  
U.S.: Hewlett-Packard Com pan y, 800 S. Taft Ave., Lovelan d, CO 80537  
C4381-90100  
Copyrigh t 1997. Hewlett-Packard Com pan y. All righ ts reserved. Hewlett-Packard is a registered tradem ark of  
Hewlett-Packard Com pan y. Microsoft an d Win dows are U.S. registered tradem arks of Microsoft Corporation . Pen tium is a  
U.S. registered tradem ark of In tel Corp. Nam es of products m en tion ed h erein are used for iden tification purposes on ly an d  
m ay be tradem arks an d/or registered tradem arks of th eir respective com pan y.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Chapter 5: Making Data CDs  
Uses for DirectCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Startin g DirectCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Erasin g th e Con ten ts on a DirectCD Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Gettin g Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
Chapter 6: Making Music CDs  
Startin g Easy-CD Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
How to Make a Music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Modifyin g Your CD Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Playin g Music CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Gettin g Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Chapter 7: Making Inserts and Labels  
Startin g Jewel Case Design er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
How to Make a Jewel Case In sert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Gettin g Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Chapter 8: Copying CDs  
Wh at Kin ds of CDs Can I Copy? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
How to Make a Copy of a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
CD Copier Advan ced Tab Settin gs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Gettin g Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Chapter 9: HP Simple Trax  
Welcom e to HP Sim ple Trax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Protectin g Files an d Folders Im m ediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Creatin g a Protection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Sch edulin g a Protection Session to Run Autom atically . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Retrievin g Protected Files an d Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Search in g th e HP Sim ple Trax In form ation Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
Chapter 10: Adobe PhotoDeluxe™  
Welcom e to Adobe Ph otoDeluxe™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Learn in g Ph otoDeluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Lookin g at Ph otoDeluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Gettin g a Ph oto in to Ph otoDeluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Savin g an d Prin tin g your Ph otos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Touch in g Up a Ph oto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Addin g Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Explorin g Advan ced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14  
Chapter 11: Corel Print House Magic™  
Wh at's in Corel Prin t House Magic? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Corel Prin t House 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Corel Ph oto House 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7  
Corel Fam ily & Frien ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10  
Chapter 12: Photo Organizer  
Gettin g Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1  
Chapter 13: PaperMaster Live Quick-Start Tutorial  
Search in g for a Docum en t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2  
Viewin g an d Custom izin g Your Docum en ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3  
Faxin g an d Prin tin g Your Docum en ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5  
Creatin g a New Cabin et an d Copyin g In form ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6  
Creatin g Custom ized Drawers an d Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7  
Filin g a Docum en t in to PaperMaster Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9  
Publish in g, Sh arin g an d Arch ivin g Cabin ets to CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10  
Closin g a Cabin et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10  
Viewin g a Cabin et Given to you on CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11  
Con gratulation s! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11  
Upgrade Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Chapter 14: Norton AntiVirus  
About Norton An tiVirus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1  
Usin g Norton An tiVirus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3  
Wh at else can I do with Norton An tiVirus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4  
Wh at to do if a virus is foun d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9  
Wh at to do if Norton An tiVirus can t repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11  
Keepin g virus protection curren t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14  
Troublesh ootin g. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17  
Appendix A: Technical Specifications  
Min im um System Requirem en ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Wh at Affects System Perform an ce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Drive Specification s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Appendix B: Customer Support  
Wh o do you n eed to call for h elp? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Before You Call HP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
HP Custom er Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Adaptec Custom er Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Adobe Ph otoDeluxe Tech n ical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Corel Prin t House Magic Service an d Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Ph oto Organ izer Custom er Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13  
PaperMaster Tech n ical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
Sym an tec Service an d Support Solution s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17  
Return in g a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Product Certifications  
UL, cUL, TÜV, NOM-NYCE, CE, C-Tick, m eets or exceeds FCC Class B  
requirem en ts  
Laser: CDRH on in tern al laser product  
Laser Safety  
Th is un it em ploys a laser. Do n ot rem ove th e cover or attem pt to service th is  
device wh en con n ected due to th e possibility of eye dam age.  
Laser-Sicherheit  
In das Gerät ist ein Laser ein gebaut. Neh m en Sie die Abdeckun g n ich t ab un d  
versuch en Sie n ich t, das Gerät zu reparieren , solan ge es an gesch lossen ist. Es  
besteh t die Gefah r ein er Augen verletzun g.  
CAUTION  
Use of con trols or adjustm en ts or perform an ce of procedures oth er th an th ose  
specified h erein m ay result in h azardous laser radiation exposure.  
WARNUNG  
Die Vorn ah m e von Regelun gen oder Ein stellun gen oder die Durch füh run g von  
Verfah ren , die n ich t in diesem Dokum en t an gegeben sin d, kan n ein e gefäh rlich e  
Ein wirkun g von Laserstrah lun g zur Folge h aben .  
Contains: Class 1 Laser Product  
Innehåller: Klass 1 Laserapparat  
Sisältää: Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
Enlt: Klasse 1 Laser-Produkt  
CAUTION: In visible laser radiation wh en open . Avoid exposure to beam .  
VARNING: Osyn lig laserstråln in g n är den n a del är öppn ad. Betrakta ej strålen .  
VARO! Avattaessa olet alttiin a n äkym ättöm älle lasersäteilylle. Alä katso säteeseen .  
VORSICHT: Un sich tbare Laserstrah lun g wen n Abdeckun g geöffn et. Nich t dem  
Strah l aussetzen .  
Laser  
Type: Sem icon ductor laser GaAlAs  
Wave len gth : 775~795 n m (at 25°C)  
Output power: 2.5 m W (read), 35 m W (write)  
Beam divergen ce: 60 degrees  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
FCC Declaration of Conformity  
Accordin g to 47CFR, Parts 2 an d 15, Class B Com puter Periph erals:  
Th is device com plies with Part 15 of th e FCC Rules. Operation is subject to th e  
followin g two con dition s: (1) th is device m ay n ot cause h arm ful in terferen ce  
(2) th is device m ust accept an y in terferen ce received in cludin g in terferen ce th at  
m ay cause un desired operation s. Th is applies to all product option s.  
Hewlett-Packard Com pan y  
Colorado Mem ory System s Division  
800 S. Taft Ave., Lovelan d, Colorado 80537, USA  
Teleph on e 970-635-1500  
February 1, 1998  
Rich ard M. Span gler, Quality Man ager  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
accord in g to ISO/ IEC Gu id e 22 an d EN 45014  
Man ufacturers Nam e:  
Hewlett-Packard Com pan y  
Colorado Mem ory System s Division  
Man ufacturers Address:  
800 S. Taft Ave.  
Lovelan d, Colorado 80537  
declares th at th e product:  
Product Nam e:  
HP SureStore CD-Writer Plus 7200e  
Product Num ber:  
Product Option s:  
C4381A  
All  
con form s to th e followin g Product Specification s:  
EN60950: A3:1995  
EN60825-1: 1994  
Safety:  
EMC:  
CISPR 22: 1993/EN 55022:1994 Class B  
EN 50082-1:1992  
IEC 801-2:1991 - 4kV CD, 8kV AD  
IEC 801-3:1984 - 3V/m  
IEC 801-4:1988  
1kV Power Lin es  
0.5kV Sign al Lin es  
ENV 50140:1993 - 3V/m  
EN 61000-3-2: 1995 Class D  
FCC Part 15 Class B  
AS/NZS 3548: 1995  
Supplem en tary In form ation  
Th e product h erewith com plies with th e requirem en ts of th e Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC an d  
th e EMC Directive 89/336/EEC an d carries th e “CE” m ark accordin gly.  
February 01, 1998  
Rich ard Span gler, Quality Man ager  
European con tact: Your local Hewlett-Packard Sales an d Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gm bH,  
Departm en t HQ-TRE, Herren berger Strabe 130, D-71034 Böblin gen (FAX: +49-7031-143143).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
Federal Communications Commission R.F. Interference  
Statement  
WARNING: Th is equipm en t h as been tested an d foun d to com ply with th e lim its  
for a Class B digital device, pursuan t to Part 15 of th e FCC Rules. Th ese lim its are  
design ed to provide reason able protection again st h arm ful in terferen ce in a  
residen tial in stallation . Th is equipm en t gen erates, uses an d can radiate radio  
frequen cy en ergy an d, if n ot in stalled an d used in accordan ce with th e  
in struction s, m ay cause h arm ful in terferen ce to radio com m un ication s. However,  
th ere is n o guaran tee th at in terferen ce will n ot occur in a particular in stallation . If  
th is equipm en t does cause h arm ful in terferen ce to radio or television reception ,  
wh ich can be determ in ed by turn in g th e equipm en t off an d on , th e user is  
en couraged to try to correct th e in terferen ce by on e or m ore of th e followin g  
m easures:  
Reorien t or relocate th e receivin g an ten n a.  
In crease th e separation between th e equipm en t an d receiver.  
Con n ect th e equipm en t in to an outlet on a circuit differen t from th at to  
wh ich th e receiver is con n ected.  
Con sult th e dealer or an experien ced radio/TV tech n ician for h elp.  
CAUTION: Ch an ges or m odification s to th is equipm en t n ot expressly approved by  
Hewlett-Packard could result in violation of Part 15 of th e FCC rules.  
To m ain tain com plian ce with FCC rules an d regulation s, use properly sh ielded  
cables with th is device.  
Notice for Canada  
Th is digital apparatus does n ot exceed th e Class B lim its for radio n oise em ission s  
from digital apparatus as set out in th e radio in terferen ce regulation s of th e  
Can adian Departm en t of Com m un ication s.  
Le présen t appareil n um érique n 'ém et pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassan t les  
lim ites applicables aux appareils n um ériques de Classe B prescrites dan s le  
règlem en t sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le Min istère des  
Com m un ication s du Can ada.  
Notice  
Europe: Th is drive sh all be in stalled on ly with an EN60950 (IEC950) approved  
Power supply.  
USA/Can ada: Th is drive is for use on ly with IBM com patible UL listed person al  
com puters, weigh in g less th an 18 kg.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
Users manual statement for VCCI class B product  
Translation for VCCI class B product  
Th is equipm en t is in th e Class B category in form ation tech n ology equipm en t  
based on th e rules of Volun tary Con trol Coun cil For In terferen ce by In form ation  
Tech n ology Equipm en t (VCCI). Alth ough aim ed for residen tial area operation ,  
radio in terferen ce m ay be caused wh en used n ear a radio or TV receiver.  
Read th e in struction s for correct operation .  
Korean RRL Statement  
Copyright notice for Denmark:  
VIGTIGT!  
Copyright ved brug af CD-Writer 7100i/ e enheder solgt i  
Danmark  
I h en h old til gælden de dan sk lov om oph avsret er det forbudt at foretage digital  
kopierin g af et digitalt værk. CD-RW bræn deren m å derfor IKKE an ven des til at  
kopiere en m usik-CD. CD-RW bræn deren m å desuden kun ben yttes til at kopiere  
et digitalt EDB-program , n år en sådan kopierin g tjen er til at frem stille et  
sikkerh edseksem plar af program m et eller h vor kopierin g er n ødven dig, for at  
program m et kan an ven des efter dets form ål. Hvis De selv h ar oph avsretten til  
værket, h ar De også retten til at foretage digital kopierin g m ed CD-RW bræn deren .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement  
HP SureStore CD-Writer Plus Drive  
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY  
Hardware - 1 year  
Software - 90 days  
1. HP warran ts to you, th e en d-user custom er, th at HP h ardware, accessories an d  
supplies will be free from defects in m aterials an d workm an sh ip after th e date of  
purch ase, for th e period specified above. If HP receives n otice of such defects  
durin g th e warran ty period, HP will, at its option , eith er repair or replace products  
wh ich prove to be defective. Replacem en t products m ay be eith er n ew or like-n ew.  
2. HP warran ts to you th at HP software will n ot fail to execute its program m in g  
in struction s after th e date of purch ase, for th e period specified above, due to  
defects in m aterial an d workm an sh ip wh en properly in stalled an d used. If HP  
receives n otice of such defects durin g th e warran ty period, HP will replace  
software m edia wh ich does n ot execute its program m in g in struction s due to such  
defects.  
3. HP does n ot warran t th at th e operation of HP products will be un in terrupted  
or error free. If HP is un able, with in a reason able tim e, to repair or replace an y  
product to a con dition as warran ted, you will be en titled to a refun d of th e  
purch ase price upon prom pt return of th e product.  
4. HP products m ay con tain rem an ufactured parts equivalen t to n ew in  
perform an ce or m ay h ave been subject to in ciden tal use.  
5. Warran ty does n ot apply to defects resultin g from (a) im proper or in adequate  
m ain ten an ce or calibration , (b) software, in terfacin g, parts or supplies n ot  
supplied by HP, (c) un auth orized m odification or m isuse, (d) operation outside of  
th e publish ed en viron m en tal specification s for th e product, or (e) im proper site  
preparation or m ain ten an ce.  
6. HP MAKES NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER  
WRITTEN OR ORAL. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,  
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE. Som e coun tries, states or provin ces  
do n ot allow lim itation s on th e duration of an im plied warran ty, so th e above  
lim itation or exclusion m igh t n ot apply to you. Th is warran ty gives you specific  
legal righ ts an d you m igh t also h ave oth er righ ts th at vary from coun try to  
coun try, state to state, or provin ce to provin ce.  
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS  
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT  
AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE  
FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL  
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED  
IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Som e coun tries, States or provin ces do  
n ot allow th e exclusion or lim itation of in ciden tal or con sequen tial dam ages, so  
th e above lim itation or exclusion m ay n ot apply to you.  
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE  
WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT  
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN  
ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE  
SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
HP Software License Agreement  
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE  
LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR  
ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE  
LICENSE TERMS, YOU MAY RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF  
THE SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN  
THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND.  
HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS  
Licen se Gran t. HP gran ts you a licen se to Use th ree (3) copies of th e Software but  
on ly for Use in con jun ction with th e HP h ardware product th at accom pan ied th e  
Software. “Use” m ean s storin g, loadin g, in stallin g, executin g or displayin g th e  
Software. You m ay n ot m odify th e Software or disable an y licen sin g or con trol  
features of th e Software.  
Ow n ersh ip. Th e Software is own ed an d copyrigh ted by HP or its th ird party  
suppliers. Your licen se con fers n o title or own ersh ip in th e Software an d is n ot a  
sale of an y righ ts in th e Software. HP's th ird party suppliers m ay protect th eir  
righ ts in th e even t of an y violation of th ese Licen se Term s.  
Copies an d Adaptation s. You m ay on ly m ake copies or adaptation s of th e  
Software for arch ival purposes or wh en copyin g or adaptation is an essen tial step  
in th e auth orized Use of th e Software. You m ust reproduce all copyrigh t n otices in  
th e origin al Software on all copies or adaptation s. You m ay n ot copy th e Software  
on to an y bulletin board or sim ilar system .  
No Disassem bly or Decryp tion . You m ay n ot disassem ble or decom pile th e  
Software un less HP's prior written con sen t is obtain ed. In som e jurisdiction s, HP's  
con sen t m ay n ot be required for lim ited disassem bly or decom pilation . Upon  
request, you will provide HP with reason ably detailed in form ation regardin g an y  
disassem bly or decom pilation . You m ay n ot decrypt th e Software un less  
decryption is a n ecessary part of th e operation of th e Software.  
Tran sfer. Your licen se will autom atically term in ate upon an y tran sfer of th e  
Software. Upon tran sfer, you m ust deliver th e Software, in cludin g an y copies an d  
related docum en tation , to th e tran sferee. Th e tran sferee m ust accept th ese Licen se  
Term s as a con dition to th e tran sfer.  
Term in ation . HP m ay term in ate your licen se upon n otice for failure to com ply  
with an y of th ese Licen se Term s. Upon term in ation , you m ust im m ediately  
destroy th e Software, togeth er with all copies, adaptation s an d m erged portion s in  
an y form .  
Export Requirem en ts. You m ay n ot export or re-export th e Software or an y copy  
or adaptation in violation of an y applicable laws or regulation s.  
U.S. Govern m en t Restricted Righ ts. Th e Software an d an y accom pan yin g  
docum en tation h ave been developed en tirely at private expen se. Th ey are  
delivered an d licen sed as “com m ercial com puter software” as defin ed in DFARS  
252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-  
7014 (Jun 1995), as a “com m ercial item ” as defin ed in FAR 2.101(a), or as  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 1:  
Con n ect in g CD-W r it er  
P lu s a n d In st a llin g t h e  
Soft wa r e  
Whats in Your Package  
Make sure you h ave th e item s sh own below. (Keep th e packagin g in case  
you n eed to tran sport th e CD-Writer Plus drive.)  
Software installation CDs  
Blank  
ReWritable  
CD  
User’s  
Guide  
Power  
supply  
Power  
cord  
HP SureStore CD-Writer Plus  
drive  
Audio  
cable  
Driver  
installation diskette  
Data cable  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2  
Connecting CD-Writer  
Connecting CD-Writer  
CAUTION: The CD-Writer Plus drive contains sensitive, high-precision optical  
equipment. Dropping or shaking the CD-Writer Plus drive may cause damage  
to these sensitive components. Please be careful when handling your drive.  
NOTE: Refer to the manual that came with your computer if you need more  
information than what is provided here.  
WARNING: DO NOT, under any circumstances, open the external CD-Writer  
Plus drive’s case. If you suspect problems with your drive, service must be  
performed by a certified HP technician. See Appendix B: Customer Support”.  
1. Sh utdown Win dows an d turn OFF your com puter.  
NOTE: The CD-Writer Plus drive can be used with laptops, desktops, and  
towers that meet “Minimum System Requirements” on page A-1.  
2. Con n ect on e en d of th e power cord in to th e power supply an d th e oth er  
en d to a wall outlet or power strip. (Th e power plug an d outlet m ay look  
differen t in your coun try.)  
To CD-Writer Plus drive  
Green light  
Power cord  
Power supply  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting CD-Writer  
1-3  
3. Con n ect th e power supply to th e power con n ector on th e back of th e  
CD-Writer Plus drive, with th e arrow on th e cable facin g up.  
To power supply  
(arrow up)  
Power connector  
Ch eck th at you h ave power to th e CD-Writer Plus drive by open in g an d  
closin g th e CD tray by pressin g th e eject button .  
NOTE: There is no power switch on the CD-Writer Plus drive or power supply.  
The energy-efficient power supply automatically switches into power-saving  
mode when the drive is not in use, and may be safely left plugged in at all  
times. However, you may safely unplug the power supply without causing  
damage to the CD-Writer Plus drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
Connecting CD-Writer  
4. Locate th e parallel port (prin ter port) con n ector on your com puter.  
If you are h avin g trouble fin din g th e parallel port con n ector, your prin ter  
m ay already be attach ed to it. Th e CD-Writer Plus drive can sh are th e  
parallel port with your prin ter.  
Parallel ports  
have receptacles  
for 25 pins.  
Select an available parallel port.  
TIP: Your CD-Writer Plus drive can share  
a parallel port with a printer.  
If th e CD-Writer Plus drive an d your prin ter will sh are th e parallel port,  
go to th e n ext step.  
If th e CD-Writer Plus drive will n ot sh are th e parallel port with your  
prin ter, proceed to step 6.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting CD-Writer  
1-5  
5. If you h ave a prin ter cable attach ed to th e com puters parallel port,  
discon n ect it from th e com puter an d plug it in to th e CD-Writer Plus  
drives con n ector th at is closest to th e power cord con n ector.  
Printer connector  
Secure the connector  
by tightening the  
retaining screws.  
Printers data cable  
(If a printer is sharing the  
parallel port with the CD-  
Writer drive.)  
Power cord connector  
CAUTION: Do not plug any device other than a printer into the CD-Writer Plus  
drive’s printer connector.  
NOTE: If your printer is attached to the CD-Writer Plus drive, printing  
documents while using the rewritable CD drive (for example, playing audio  
CDs, writing to disc) will yield unpredictable results and is not a supported  
function. This is because the printer and CD-Writer Plus drive are sharing the  
same data cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
Connecting CD-Writer  
6. Attach th e CD-Writer Plus drives data cable to your com puters 25-pin  
parallel port con n ector an d h an d tigh ten th e retain in g screws.  
Attach th e data cables rem ain in g con n ector to th e rewritable drive an d  
secure it by tigh ten in g th e retain in g screws.  
Attach this end to the  
computers parallel port.  
Attach this end to the CD-  
Writer Plus drive.  
CD-Writer Plus drive’s data cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting CD-Writer  
1-7  
7. Con n ectin g th e audio cable is OPTIONAL. If you do n ot wish to use it, go  
to step 10.  
Th e audio cable is used on ly for h earin g m usic CDs th rough your  
com puters soun d system . If you do n ot h ave a soun d board in your  
com puter, you can still h ear m usic CDs th rough speakers or earph on es  
attach ed to th e fron t of th e CD-Writer Plus drive.  
NOTE: When the CD-Writer Plus drive records music or data, it uses the data  
cable, not the audio cable.  
8. If you h ave a soun d board, con n ect th e audio cable to a LINE IN audio  
con n ector on th e back of your com puter. (Your soun d board m ay be  
labeled differen tly.)  
9. Con n ect th e oth er en d of th e audio cable to th e audio con n ector on th e  
back of th e CD-Writer Plus drive.  
LINE IN connector on  
sound board (Your sound  
board may be labeled  
differently.)  
Audio connector  
Audio cable  
(optional)  
10. Plug in an d turn ON your com puter.  
11. You are n ow ready to in stall th e parallel port drivers an d th e application  
software. (See “In stallin g th e Software for Win dows 95 or Win dows NT  
4.0” on page 1-8.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
If You Have Problems  
If You Have Problems  
After con n ectin g your CD-Writer Plus drive an d turn in g on your  
com puter, th e com puter sh ould start (boot) as it n orm ally does. If it does  
n ot, ch eck th e followin g item s:  
Is th e com puter power plugged in ?  
Is each device plugged in an d turn ed on ?  
Are all cables properly plugged in to th e back of your com puter an d  
th e CD-Writer Plus drive?  
Try turn in g off your com puter. Wait at least 20 secon ds before turn in g  
it back on .  
Installing the Software for Windows 95 or  
Windows NT 4.0  
After th e CD-Writer Plus drive is attach ed to your com puter, you are  
ready to in stall th e application software.  
NOTE: You must run the installation program. The installation program  
converts the files from the CD into a usable format.  
If yo u r co m p u t er DOES NOT h a ve a CD-ROM d r ive:  
1. To get your CD-Writer Plus started righ t away, in sert th e diskette labeled  
Driver Installation in to your floppy drive.  
2. Click th e Start button on th e task bar, select Ru n .  
3. Type A:\SETUP(wh ere A: is your floppy drives letter), an d press ENTER.  
Th e parallel port driver files are in stalled. Th is m ay take several m in utes  
an d your m ouse cursor will n ot m ove.  
4. Windows NT only: Reboot your com puter before con tin uin g.  
5. In sert th e CD labeled “Software Disc 1” in to your n ew CD-Writer Plus  
drive an d proceed with step 2 in th e n ext procedure.  
NOTE: For information about inserting a CD into the CD-Writer Plus drive,  
see “Inserting a CD” on page 2-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If You Have Problems  
1-9  
If yo u r co m p u t er DOES h a ve a CD-ROM d r ive:  
1. In sert th e CD labeled “Software Disc 1” in to your CD-ROM drive (n ot th e  
CD-Writer Plus drive), if you h ave n ot already don e so. Th e m ain m en u  
appears:  
Click the  
Install CD-  
Writer Plus  
icon  
If th e m ain m en u does n ot appear autom atically, click on th e Start  
button on th e task bar, select Run , type D:\SETUP(wh ere D: is your CD  
drives letter), th en click on OK.  
2. Click on th e In stall CD-Writer Plus icon . Follow th e in struction s on th e  
screen .  
If You Have Problems  
Things to Try First  
Make sure th e com puter an d each device is plugged in an d turn ed on .  
Does your com puter m eet th e m in im um system requirem en ts listed  
in “Min im um System Requirem en ts” on page A-1?  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
If You Have Problems  
Turn off th e com puters power, wait 20 secon ds, th en turn it on again .  
Un plug th e CD-Writer Plus drive an d plug it in again . (Th is is called  
cycling power.)  
Discon n ect all th e cables, look for an d straigh ten an y pin s, an d th en  
recon n ect th e cables. Som etim es just recon n ectin g a cable align s it  
correctly or adjusts th e pin con n ection s, fixin g a faulty con n ection .  
Ch eck th e list of kn own com patibility problem s (on page 3-7) an d in  
th e Readm e file.  
Make sure th at th ere is n o switch box an ywh ere in th e CD-Writer Plus  
drives cablin g con figuration .  
If you h ave a prin ter con n ected to th e CD-Writer Plus drive, ch eck to  
see if your com puter can detect th e CD-Writer Plus drive wh en th e  
prin ter is discon n ected.  
Ch eck to m ake sure th at your parallel port is truly con figured as eith er  
EPP or ECP. Ch eck th e m an ual th at cam e with your com puter to fin d  
out h ow.  
Ch eck f o r a co n f lict w it h t h e p a r a llel p o r t (so m e o t h er d evice  
u sin g t h e sa m e IRQ o r I/ O a s t h e p a r a llel p o r t ).  
In Windows 95, to fin d out if th ere is a con flict:  
- Righ t-click on th e My Com puter icon  
- Select Prop erties  
- Select th e Device Man ager tab:  
Un der th e h eadin g SCSI Con trollers, fin d Sh uttle EPAT  
Extern al ATAPI Adapter, an d select Prop erties  
AND  
Un der th e h eadin g Ports, fin d Prin ter Port, an d select  
Prop erties  
If you see a yellow exclamation mark to th e left of th is lin e,  
you do h ave a con flict. Determ in e wh ich oth er device is  
usin g th e sam e settin gs as your parallel port an d ch an ge  
th e settin gs on th e oth er device.  
If you discover you do h ave a con flict, to fin d out wh ich device is in  
con flict:  
In Windows 95, righ t-click on th e My Com p u ter icon , select  
Prop erties, select th e Device Man ager tab, double-click on th e  
com puter icon to see a list of wh ich device is usin g each resource  
settin g on your com puter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If You Have Problems  
1-11  
In Windows NT (wh ile sign ed on as Adm in istrator), from th e Start  
m en u on th e task bar, select Program s/ Adm in istrative Tools  
(Com m on )/ Win d ow s NT d iagn ostics. Select th e Resou rces tab to  
view th e list of wh ich resources are bein g used by wh ich device.  
Er r o r m essa g e w h en I d o u b le-click o n t h e CD-W r it er P lu s  
d r ives icon  
Th ere is n o CD in th e CD-Writer Plus drive; in sert a CD an d try again .  
After in sertin g a CD, you n eed to wait a m om en t to let th e CD-Writer  
Plus drive read th e disc in form ation (wait un til th e ligh t on th e fron t  
of th e drive stops flash in g an d stays green ), th en click on th e CD-  
Writer Plus drives icon again .  
Th e CD m ay be in th e tray upside-down or a little off-cen ter; try  
rein sertin g th e CD. Th e label sh ould be facin g up.  
You are tryin g to read from a blan k recordable CD. Try again after  
copyin g som e in form ation to th e CD.  
In W in d o w s Ex p lo r er , u n a b le t o see t h e CD la b el o r a ll t h e  
sessio n s/ f iles o n t h e CD  
Refresh th e screen . Select th e My Com p u ter icon in Win dows Explorer  
an d press F5.  
P r in t er n o lo n g er w o r k s a f t er co n n ect in g t h e CD-W r it er P lu s  
d r ive  
P r o b lem s p r in t in g a f ile  
See “Check for a conflict with the parallel port (some other device using the  
same IRQ or I/O as the parallel port).” on page 1-10. For exam ple, a  
soun d board or fax/m odem board m ay be usin g th e sam e IRQ. If you  
discover con flicts, ch an ge th e IRQ settin g on th e oth er device. Refer  
to th e m an uals th at cam e with your com puter an d oth er devices for  
in struction s.  
If your prin ter is attach ed to th e CD-Writer Plus drive, prin tin g  
docum en ts wh ile usin g th e rewritable CD drive (for exam ple, playin g  
audio CDs, writin g to disc) will yield un predictable results an d is n ot  
a supported fun ction . Th is is because th e prin ter an d CD-Writer Plus  
drive are sh arin g th e sam e data cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
Uninstalling the Software Programs  
Syst em d o es n o t r eco g n ize t h e CD-W r it er P lu s d r ive  
In Windows 95, sim ply click on th e Con n ect or Discon n ect extern al  
drive icon on your desktop.  
Select Sh uttle EPAT Extern al ATAPI Adapter, th en click Discon n ect.  
Restart your com puter, or sh ut it down an d th en turn it on again .  
Watch for th e green ligh t on th e fron t of th e CD-Writer Plus drive to  
blin k as th e com puter boots up  
Select Sh uttle EPAT Extern al ATAPI Adapter, th en click Con n ect.  
Make sure th e CD-Writer Plus drives cables are con n ected properly.  
See “Check for a conflict with the parallel port (some other device using the  
same IRQ or I/O as the parallel port).” on page 1-10. For exam ple, a  
soun d board or fax/m odem board m ay be usin g th e sam e IRQ. If you  
discover a con flict(s), ch an ge th e settin g on th e oth er device. Refer to  
th e m an uals th at cam e with your com puter an d oth er devices for  
in struction s.  
Th e power supply sh ould h ave a steady green ligh t wh en con n ected  
at both en ds. If it is flash in g, try a differen t power outlet. If it is still  
flash in g th e power supply could be dam aged.  
Uninstalling the Software Programs  
You can rem ove all of CD-Writer Pluss program s or in dividual program s.  
CAUTION: If you want to reinstall the CD-Writer Plus drive’s software, first be  
sure to uninstall the original software.  
1. Click th e Start button .  
Poin t to Program s.  
Poin t to HP CD-Writer Plus.  
Poin t to Tools & In form ation .  
Poin t to Utilities.  
Click Un in stall.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Moving CD-Writer Plus to Another Computer  
1-13  
2. Select th e CD-Writer Plus drives program (s) th at you wish to rem ove.  
3. Click th e Fin ish button .  
Th e software is rem oved, in cludin g all related en tries in your system  
registry.  
Moving CD-Writer Plus to Another  
Computer  
CAUTION: The CD-Writer Plus contains sensitive, high-precision optical  
equipment. Dropping or shaking the CD-Writer Plus may cause damage to  
these sensitive components. Please be careful when handling your drive.  
You can discon n ect th e CD-Writer Plus drive an d m ove it to an oth er  
com puter, as lon g as th e oth er com puter m eets th e “Min im um System  
Requirem en ts” on page A-1.  
Th e CD-Writer Plus drive can be used by on ly on e com puter at a tim e. Do  
n ot try to use th e CD-Writer Plus drive on m ore th an on e m ach in e by  
attach in g it to a switch box.  
To d iscon n ect t h e CD-W r it er P lu s d r ive:  
1. In Windows NT, go to step 2.  
In Windows 95, click on th e Con n ect or Discon n ect extern al d rive icon  
on th e desktop.  
Select Sh uttle EPAT Extern al ATAPI Adapter, th en click Discon n ect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14  
Moving CD-Writer Plus to Another Computer  
2. Un plug th e CD-Writer Pluss power supply from th e outlet or power strip.  
(Th e power plug an d outlet m ay look differen t in your coun try.)  
Power supply  
NOTE: There is no power switch on the CD-Writer Plus drive or power supply.  
You may safely unplug the power supply without damage to the CD-Writer Plus  
drive.  
3. Discon n ect th e CD-Writer Plus data cable an d audio cable (if an y) from  
th e back of th e com puter.  
Data cable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Moving CD-Writer Plus to Another Computer  
1-15  
4. Discon n ect th e prin ter cable (if an y)  
from your CD-Writer Plus drive an d  
recon n ect it to th e prin ter port on th e  
back of your com puter (oth er cables  
n ot sh own but still attach ed).  
5. You are ready to con n ect th e CD-  
Writer Plus drive to an oth er com puter.  
To co n n ect t h e CD-W r it er P lu s d r ive t o a n o t h er co m p u t er :  
1. Follow th e direction s for “Con n ectin g CD-Writer” on page 1-2.  
2. Th e first tim e you attach th e CD-Writer Plus drive to th is com puter,  
follow th e direction s in “In stallin g th e Software for Win dows 95 or  
Win dows NT 4.0” on page 1-8.  
Each addition al tim e, after con n ectin g all th e cables:  
In Windows NT, reboot your com puter.  
In Windows 95, sim ply click on th e Con n ect or Discon n ect extern al  
drive icon on your desktop.  
Select Sh uttle EPAT Extern al ATAPI Adapter, th en click Con n ect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 2:  
Usin g You r CD-W r it er  
P lu s  
Th is ch apter describes h ow to use an d purch ase CDs, h ow to take care of  
your drive, an d h ow to fin d out its drive letter.  
Using CDs  
Inserting a CD  
1. Press th e eject button on th e CD-Writer fron t pan el.  
2. Set th e CD in th e tray with th e labeled side up.  
Eject button  
3. Press th e eject button again or push gen tly on th e fron t of th e tray to  
sh ut th e tray.  
2-1  
The following are variables (to change: Special/Varialble- Edit definition):  
c4357-90100 Rev. A (Part-number)  
\ \ Bldmach2\ tw\ TW\ MAN\ CD\ cutthroat\ external\ 4381-90100\ using.fm  
(Filename long)  
CD-Writer (Drive-name)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
Using CDs  
Wh en you access th e CD-Writer Plus drive from with in a program , you  
sh ould be able to read th e files on th e in serted CD. If you h ave problem s:  
Th e CD m ay be in th e tray upside-down or a little off-cen ter; try  
rein sertin g th e CD. Th e label sh ould be facin g up.  
After in sertin g a CD, you n eed to wait a m om en t to let th e CD-Writer  
Plus drive read th e disc in form ation (wait un til th e ligh t on th e fron t  
of th e drive stops flash in g an d stays green ), th en click on th e CD-  
Writer Plus drives icon again .  
Are you tryin g to read from a blan k recordable CD? Try again after  
copyin g som e in form ation to th e CD.  
Removing a CD  
1. Press th e eject button on th e HP CD-Writer drive fron t pan el.  
2. Rem ove th e CD from th e tray.  
3. Press th e eject button again or push gen tly on th e fron t of th e tray to  
sh ut th e fron t pan el.  
Choosing CDs for Your CD-Writer  
For best results, use Hewlett-Packard CD-RW (ReWritable) or CD-R  
(Recordable or write-on ce) m edia, available from your local ven dor.  
Ideas for usin g CD-RW (ReWritable) discs wh ich can on ly be used in CD-  
ReWritable drives or n ewer MultiRead CD-ROMs:  
Use as if it were a large-capacity floppy disk  
Copy your im portan t files each week  
Free up disk space on your h ard drive  
Tran sport files to an d from work/h om e  
Hold large com plex files as you develop th em  
Sh are presen tation s in editable form  
Create person alized presen tation s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using CDs  
2-3  
Ideas for usin g CD-R (Recordable or write-on ce) discs wh ich can be read  
in m ost CD-ROM or CD-Recordable drive:  
Perm an en tly save large project files  
Sh are n on -editable presen tation s  
Perm an en tly store h om e records  
Sh are m em ories with fam ily an d frien ds  
Copy your m usic on to CD for person al use  
Make copies of m usic you created for record com pan y dem os  
Perm an en tly arch ive files  
P u r ch a se H P CD-RW (ReW r it a b le) m ed ia  
Available from your local ven dor, th ese CDs can on ly be used with CD-  
ReWritable drives or read from n ewer MultiRead CD-ROMs:  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 1 pack (C4431A)  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 3 pack (C4431C)  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 25 pack (C4431D)  
NOTE: Do not mix audio and data files on the same CD since they require  
different formats.  
P u r ch a se H P CD-R (Reco r d a b le o r w r it e-o n ce) m ed ia  
Available from your local ven dor, th ese CDs can be read by m ost CD-  
ROM, CD-Recordable, an d CD-ReWritable drives (use th is type of m edia  
if you wan t to listen to your m usic CDs in a stereo):  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 1 pack (C4432A)  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 3 pack (C4432C)  
12 cm (650 MB, 74-m in ute) 25 pack (C4432D)  
NOTE: Do not mix audio and data files on the same CD since they require  
different formats.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
Th e CD-Writer Plus drive requires n o m ain ten an ce or clean in g. If you  
sim ply keep your CDs clean , you will preven t m ost problem s.  
CAUTION: Do NOT use the CD-ROM cleaning discs that rely on a small brush  
to sweep dirt off the laser. Do NOT use high-pressure air to clean the inside of  
the drive. These cleaning techniques will damage the CD-Writer Plus drive.  
Identifying CD-Writer Pluss Drive Letter  
No t su r e w h ich d r ive let t er w a s a ssig n ed t o t h e CD-W r it er P lu s  
d r ive?  
Th e CD-Writer Plus drive will h ave a drive icon just like a CD-ROM drive  
icon . You can determ in e wh ich icon is your CD-ROM drive an d wh ich  
icon is your CD-Writer Plus drive by double-clickin g on th e My  
Com p u ter icon , righ t-clickin g on th e CD drive icon , an d selectin g Eject.  
Th e tray of th e selected drive will open .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 3:  
P r ob lem Solvin g  
If you are h avin g difficulties with a software application ch eck th at  
application s ch apter an d on -lin e h elp for troublesh ootin g in form ation .  
If you n eed furth er assistan ce, th e table on page B-1 will h elp you fin d  
th e ph on e n um bers for th e appropriate custom er support service.  
Read th is section if you run in to trouble with your CD-Writer Plus drive.  
If after reviewin g th e section you n eed furth er assistan ce, call th e ph on e  
n um bers listed in “Appen dix B: Custom er Support”  
Gath er th e in form ation on page B-2 before callin g for h elp. Having this  
information ready will greatly facilitate your call.  
Things to Try First  
Does your com puter m eet th e m in im um system requirem en ts  
(see“Min im um System Requirem en ts” on page A-1 )?  
Make sure your com puter an d CD-Writer Plus drive are plugged in  
an d th at each device attach ed to your com puter is turn ed on .  
Turn off th e com puters power, un plug th e CD-Writer Plus drive, an d  
wait 20 secon ds. Th en plug in th e CD-Writer Plus drive an d turn on  
your com puter. (Th is is called cycling power.)  
Discon n ect all th e cables an d th en recon n ect th em . Som etim es just  
recon n ectin g a cable align s it correctly or adjusts th e pin con n ection s,  
fixin g a faulty con n ection . (Ch eck for ben t pin s on th e con n ectors  
an d straigh ten th em .)  
Make sure th at you are usin g th e righ t type of CD. See “Ch oosin g CDs  
for Your CD-Writer” on page 2-2.  
Try th e operation with a differen t CD.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
Ch eck th e list of kn own com patibility problem s (page 3-7) an d in th e  
Readm e file.  
If your com puter h as a power-m an agem en t feature, disable it (see th e  
m an ual th at cam e with your com puter).  
If your system is run n in g prin ter status m on itor software, disable it  
(page 3-7).  
Make sure th at you are n ot attach in g a parallel port switch box  
an ywh ere in th e CD-Writer Plus drives cablin g con figuration .  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
Not sure wh ich drive letter was assign ed to th e CD-Writer Plus drive?  
(See “Iden tifyin g CD-Writer Pluss Drive Letter” on page 2-4.)  
Error m essage wh en I double-click on th e CD-Writer Plus drives icon  
(see page 1-11)  
In Win dows Explorer, un able to see th e CD label or all th e session s/  
files on th e CD (see page 1-11)  
Prin ter n o lon ger works after con n ectin g th e CD-Writer Plus drive (see  
page 1-11)  
Problem s prin tin g a file (see page 1-11)  
System does n ot recogn ize th e CD-Writer Plus drive (see page 1-12)  
Copyin g directly from on e CD to an oth er doesn t work. (see page 3-3)  
Audio soun ds poor (see page 3-3)  
Video is ch oppy (see page 3-4)  
Buffer un derrun error m essages (see page 3-4)  
Un able to read a secon d session readin g from a CD-ROM drive (see  
page 3-5)  
Application s can n ot fin d your CD in th e CD-Writer Plus drive (see  
page 3-5)  
Lost power to your com puter or h ad to press CTRL-ALT-DEL wh ile  
writin g to th e CD! (see page 3-6)  
Hard Drive Com pression Software (see page 3-6)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
3-3  
Ach ievin g optim al perform an ce (see page 3-6)  
Prin ter Status Mon itor Software (see page 3-7)  
Kn own Com patibility Problem s (see page 3-7)  
Fin din g th e CD-Writer Plus driver files. (see page 3-8)  
Co p yin g d ir ect ly f r o m o n e CD t o a n o t h er d o esn t w o r k .  
WARNING: Only reproduce material for which you own the copyright or have  
obtained permission to copy from the copyright owner. Unless you own the  
copyright or have permission to copy from the copyright owner, you may be  
violating copyright law and be subject to payment of damages and other  
remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact your legal advisor.  
Som e CD-ROMs will n ot allow direct copyin g to th e CD-Writer Plus  
drive or are n ot capable of digital audio extraction .  
You m ust h ave eith er a SCSI 2 CD-ROM drive (see th e drives guide for  
in form ation ) or a supported ATAPI CD-ROM drive as your source.  
Som e CDs h ave a copy preven tion feature or oth er features th at do  
n ot allow a CD-to-CD copy.  
Au d io so u n d s p o o r  
If your prin ter is attach ed to th e CD-Writer Plus drive, prin tin g  
docum en ts wh ile playin g audio CDs will yield un predictable results  
an d is n ot a supported CD-Writer Plus drive fun ction . Th is is because  
th e prin ter an d CD-Writer Plus drive are sh arin g th e sam e data cable.  
Make sure th e audio con n ectors are com pletely plugged in to th e back  
of th e CD-Writer Plus drive an d th e LINE IN con n ector of th e soun d  
card on th e back of th e com puter. (Your soun d board m ay be labeled  
differen tly.)  
Verify th at you do n ot h ave a soun d-m utin g feature turn ed on , by  
way of th e m on itor or software.  
Ch eck th e soun d com in g from th e CD-Writer Plus drive by pluggin g  
earph on es or speakers to th e audio con n ector on th e front of th e CD-  
Writer Plus drive. If th e soun d quality is good, th e problem is  
probably with th e soun d board, speakers, or audio cable. Refer to th e  
docum en tation th at cam e with your soun d board an d speakers for  
h elp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
Try listen in g to th e wave files on your h ard drive to see if th ey  
soun ded poor before copyin g th em to CD. (You can use th e Media  
Player program foun d un der Multim edia in Win dows’ Accessories.)  
Vid eo is ch o p p y  
Th is can be caused by th e sam e situation s th at cause buffer un derrun s.  
Th is can also h appen if your video card is slow. Try th e followin g:  
Try th e solution s for buffer un derrun s (page 3-4).  
Upgrade your video card.  
Reduce th e size of th e video win dow an d close an y oth er program s  
th at are run n in g.  
Bu f f er u n d er r u n er r o r m essa g es  
Wh en usin g Easy-CD Audio or Disc Copier:  
Make sure your system m eets th e m in im um system requirem en ts  
(page A-1).  
Buffer un derrun m ay be caused by h ard drive com pression software  
(page 3-6).  
NEVER write to th e recordable CD wh ile oth er application s are  
run n in g th at could in terrupt th e writin g-to-CD process. Log off an y  
n etworks, disable an y fax m odem , em ail, screen saver, or oth er  
program s (such as TSRs, term in ate-an d-stay-residen t program s) th at  
m ay autom atically sen d m essages to your com puter wh ile writin g  
data to th e CD. If th e in terruption is lon g en ough , you could ruin a  
write-on ce CD to wh ich you are writin g.  
Exit any oth er program s wh ile writin g data to th e CD.  
If your com puter h as a power-m an agem en t feature, disable it (see th e  
m an ual th at cam e with your com puter).  
Run SCANDISK.EXE an d DEFRAG.EXE periodically on your h ard  
drive (see your Win dows m an ual for m ore in form ation ). Th ese  
program s im prove access tim es to th e h ard drive, wh ich will h elp  
im prove system perform an ce wh ile writin g to an d readin g from th e  
CD-Writer Plus drive.  
Buffer un derrun s could also be caused by an un supported parallel port  
(stan dard m ode SPP). See “Min im um System Requirem en ts” on page A-  
1. Try th e followin g:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
3-5  
Ch an ge th e parallel port settin gs to EPP or ECP in CMOS, if your  
com puter can support th e ch an ge. See th e m an ual th at cam e with  
your com puter to fin d out h ow.  
In stall a n ew EPP or ECP parallel port card.  
Write data to th e CD at 1x speed if you are given th e ch oice with in  
th e software.  
Disable an y prin ter status m on itor software (page 3-7).  
Un a b le t o r ea d a seco n d sessio n r ea d in g f r o m a CD-ROM d r ive  
Eject th e CD an d rein sert it.  
Refresh th e screen . Select th e My Com p u ter icon in Win dows  
Explorer an d press F5.  
CD-RW (ReWritable) discs can on ly be used in CD-ReWritable drives  
or n ewer MultiRead CD-ROMs.  
If you are trying to read your CD from Windows 3.x: Multi-session CDs  
created with Direct CD can n ot be read in DOS or Win dows 3.x. If  
your m ulti-session CD was created usin g som e oth er program , verify  
th at you are usin g version 2.23 of th e MSCDEX.EXE file. First, restart  
your com puter an d wh en you see “Startin g MS-DOS...” appear on  
your m on itor, press F8. Each lin e in your CONFIG.SYS an d  
AUTOEXEC.BAT file will load on e at a tim e. Press “Yun til you see a  
lin e con tain in g “MSCDEX.EXE”. Th en press “Yan d th e version  
n um ber of your MSCDEX file will display. Th e n um ber m ust be 2.23  
or greater. Call Microsoft for an updated file if you n eed it.  
See if th e CD-Writer Plus drive or oth er CD-ROM drives can read th e  
CD. If so, th e problem is probably with th e CD-ROM drive. Con tact  
th e m an ufacturer of th is drive for updated drivers.  
Ap p lica t io n s ca n n o t f in d yo u r CD in t h e CD-W r it er P lu s d r ive  
Som e program s (CD-ROM gam es, etc.) look on ly for th e first logical drive  
letter assign ed to a CD-ROM drive or CD-Writer Plus drive. For exam ple,  
if your CD-ROM drive is assign ed drive D:\ an d th e CD-Writer Plus drive  
is assign ed drive E:\ , th e program is lookin g for th e CD on ly in drive D:\  
an d will n ot see th e CD in drive E:\ . If you wan t to use th e CD-Writer  
Plus drive for th ese types of program s, reassign th e drive letters, m akin g  
th e CD-Writer Plus drive com e before th e CD-ROM drive, as follows:  
In Windows 95, display th e Device Man ager an d double-click on  
CDROM. Double-click on th e CD-ROM drive, an d th en click on th e  
Settin gs tab. Un der Reserved drive letters, select th e drive letter after  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
th e existin g letter (for both start an d en d drive letter) an d click on  
OK. Th en double-click on th e CD-Writer Plus drive, an d th en click on  
th e Settin gs tab. Un der Reserved drive letters, select th e drive letter  
before th e curren t on e an d click on OK.  
In Windows NT, click on Start/Program s/Ad m in istrative  
Tools(com m on ). Ch oose Disk Adm in istrator. Righ t-click on th e  
drive letter you wish to ch an ge. Select Assign Drive Letter. Ch an ge  
th e drive letter.  
Lo st p o w er t o yo u r co m p u t er o r h a d t o p r ess CTRL-ALT-DEL  
w h ile w r it in g t o t h e CD!  
If you lose power wh ile writin g to your CD (th e CD-Writer Plus drive's  
red ligh t is on ) OR If you exit an application or press CTRL-ALT-DEL  
wh ile writin g to CD...  
You m ay be able to salvage your CD, but ONLY if you:  
1. LEAVE YOUR CD IN THE DRIVE, DO NOT OPEN THE DISC TRAY  
2. Turn your m ach in e off  
3. Turn it back on  
4. Th en re-en ter th e application you were usin g  
On ce th e application tries to access th e CD-Writer Plus drive, th e  
recovery operation will m ake it appear th at th e last session is th ere.  
However, in reality, on ly a part of th e CD's directory m ay be th ere. Your  
recordable CD is still usable if you can read th e directory. Repeat th e  
en tire copy operation to m ake sure th at your files are copied to th e  
recordable or ReWritable CD.  
H a r d Dr ive Co m p r essio n So f t w a r e  
We do n ot recom m en d usin g h ard drive com pression software. If you use  
h ard drive com pression software, it estim ates free h ard drive space based  
upon a com pression ratio (often user selectable). Program s m ay ch eck  
your h ard drive for space n eeded an d m ay th in k you h ave th e n ecessary  
free space. However, depen din g on th e type of files you are copyin g, you  
m ay in fact n ot h ave en ough h ard drive space.  
Ach ievin g o p t im a l p er f o r m a n ce  
Run SCANDISK.EXE an d DEFRAG.EXE on your h ard drive before usin g  
your CD-Writer Plus drive for th e first tim e (see your Win dows m an ual  
for m ore in form ation ). Th en run th em periodically after th at. Th ese  
program s im prove access tim es to th e h ard drive, wh ich will h elp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Symptoms and Solutions  
3-7  
im prove system perform an ce wh ile writin g to an d readin g from th e CD-  
Writer Plus drive.  
P r in t er St a t u s Mo n it o r So f t w a r e  
NOTE: This is only an issue if your printer is connected to the back of the CD-  
Writer Plus drive.  
If your prin ter cam e with a program th at n otifies you about th e status of  
th e prin ter (such as wh en it is out of paper), th is printer status monitor  
software m igh t cause problem s. Th e printer status monitor software ch ecks  
th e status of your prin ter every few secon ds. If th is h appen s wh ile you are  
writin g data to your recordable CD, it will cause data corruption . Turn off  
th e printer status monitor software to preven t th is problem . Ch eck th e  
in form ation th at cam e with your prin ter to fin d out h ow to do th is.  
Kn o w n Co m p a t ib ilit y P r o b lem s  
Ch eck th e Readm e file th at cam e with th e CD-Writer Plus drive for  
addition al in form ation .  
Ch eck th e web site listed on page B-5 for th e m ost recen t in form ation .  
Maxtor Hard Drives  
You m igh t be un able to write reliably to th e CD-Writer Plus drive if  
your com puter h as a Maxtor h ard drive (th e followin g m odels):  
71626A/AP (1.6 Gbyte)  
712260A (1.2 Gbyte)  
72004A/AP (2.0 Gbyte)  
CD recordable devices require an un in terrupted data stream from th e  
h ard drive in order to write successfully to a CD. Th ese h ard drive  
m odels are design ed with a built-in in terrupt loop th at m ay cause CD  
corruption . Please con tact Maxtor's custom er support at 1-800-2-  
MAXTOR or on th e World Wide Web at h ttp://www.m axtor.com / for  
m ore in form ation .  
Acer com puters, som e m odels P75 to P120  
DO NOT con n ect th e CD-Writer Plus drive to th e prin ter (parallel)  
port. On th ese m odels, con n ectin g an extern al storage device, such as  
th e CD-Writer Plus drive, to th e parallel port will dam age th e port.  
Con tact your com puter m an ufacturer for m ore in form ation .  
IBM Aptiva com puters  
Most h ave th e parallel port con figured to I/O base address 3BC. Th is  
m ust be ch an ged, see “Min im um System Requirem en ts” on page A-1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 4:  
Sh a r in g You r CDs  
How you write your data to CD an d th e type of CDs th at you use will  
determ in e wh o else can read th e data from your discs. Th is ch apter  
briefly explain s som e of th e option s you h ave in creatin g CDs th at can be  
sh ared with oth ers usin g differen t com puter an d CD setups.  
Varying Formats  
CD tech n ology h as progressed rapidly over th e last few years from CD-  
ROM to writable CD, an d on to th e tech n ology you n ow own in your  
rewritable CD-Writer Plus. On e of th e results of th ese developm en ts is  
th at data can be written in several form ats an d on differen t types of CDs.  
Sharing CDs across Different Formats  
Using CD-RW Discs  
W h en sh ou ld I u se CD-RW d iscs?  
CD-RW m edia is th e ideal solution for exten ded person al storage on your  
own m ach in e. You can write, erase, an d rewrite data easily from  
application s an d from th e Win dows Explorer. Your CD-Writer Plus drive,  
coupled with CD-RW m edia, can fun ction as an exten sion of th e h ard  
drive on your m ach in e. Use CD-RW m edia:  
To save work in progress like presen tation s, docum en ts, etc.  
Make weekly arch ives of files on your h ard drive.  
Sh uttle files between th e office an d h om e if you h ave a CD-Writer  
Plus at each location , or h ave an extern al CD-Writer Plus to use on  
both com puters.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
Sharing CDs across Different Formats  
Ca n I sh a r e a CD-RW d isc?  
Yes. You can sh are a CD-RW disc directly with som eon e own in g an oth er  
CD-RW drive or with som eon e th at h as a MultiRead CD-ROM drive an d  
UDF reader software. MultiRead CD-ROM drives are a recen t in n ovation  
to CD-ROM tech n ology, so wh ile n ot all CD-ROMs are MultiRead, th ey  
are available to users world wide.  
H ow d o I k n ow if a CD-ROM is Mu lt iRea d ?  
Look for th e MultiRead certification logo on th e CD-ROMs packagin g or  
users guide. Th e drive will be described as MultiRead certified or will list  
CD-RW as supported m edia. You can also put a CD-RW disc in your CD-  
ROM an d see if it can read it.  
W h a t if I w a n t t o sh a r e w it h u ser s t h a t h a ve st a n d a r d CD-ROM  
d r ives?  
In gen eral, you m ust copy your in form ation to a CD-R disc to sh are it  
with users th at h ave stan dard CD-ROM drives. To accom plish th is:  
1. In sert your CD-RW disc in your CD-Writer Plus drive.  
2. Copy all th e in form ation from th e CD-RW disc to a un ique location on  
your h ard drive.  
3. Replace th e CD-RW disc in your CD-Writer Plus with a blan k CD-R disc.  
4. Copy th e in form ation from your h ard drive to th e CD-R m edia usin g  
Direct CD.  
5. Wh en you eject th e disc, DirectCD prom pts you to eith er leave th e disc  
open , or close th e disc so it can be read in a stan dard CD-ROM drive.  
Select th e option to close th e CD.  
NOTE: For additional information on sharing CDs with Windows 3.x and  
DOS users, see “What if I used DirectCD to create my CD-R disc?” on page 4-3.  
Ca n I p la y a n a u d io d isc I m a d e on a CD-RW d isc in m y ca r or  
h om e CD p la yer ?  
Probably n ot. Most car an d h om e CD players are n ot capable of readin g  
in form ation off of CD-RW m edia. You m ust record your audio on CD-R  
discs to play th em on m ost con ven tion al CD players. Th ere are h owever  
som e n ewly released auto an d h om e CD players th at can read th e CD-RW  
m edia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sharing CDs across Different Formats  
4-3  
Using CD-R Discs  
W h en sh ou ld I u se CD-R d iscs?  
Th e data you put on a CD-R can t be erased. Use CD-R discs:  
Wh en you wan t to protect your data so th at it can n ot be erased  
If you wan t to sh are your CD with users th at h ave stan dard CD-ROM  
drives  
For audio CDs  
Ca n I a u t om a t ica lly sh a r e a CD-R w it h a n yon e?  
Not n ecessarily. Th e software application you use will determ in e with  
wh om you can easily sh are th e CD.  
W h a t if I u sed Dir ect CD t o cr ea t e m y CD-R d isc?  
Wh en you eject th e disc from th e drive, DirectCD will prom pt you to  
eith er leave th e disc open so you can add m ore data later, or close th e  
disc so it can be read in a stan dard CD-ROM drive. If you in ten d to sh are  
th e disc with oth er users, th en you m ust “close” th e disc.  
Win dows 95 an d Win dows NT. If you are sh arin g a “closed” CD-R  
with an oth er Win dows 95 or Win dows NT user, your disc is n ow  
ready to be sh ared.  
Th ere m ay be som e CD-ROMs th at can t read th e CD-R. If you h ave  
problem s try turn in g off th e “Read Ah ead” on your CD-ROM. Refer to  
your operatin g system docum en tation on h ow to do th is. An oth er  
option is to use CD Copier to create a disc copy of your origin al CD-R  
disc. A description of h ow to do th is can be foun d in th e section  
“How to Make a Copy of a CD” on page 8-3.  
Win dows 3.x an d DOS. Som e addition al steps are required if you  
wan t to sh are your “closed” disc with Win dows 3.x or DOS users. You  
will n eed to create a copy of your origin al CD-R disc on an oth er piece  
of CD-R m edia usin g th e CD Copier application . Th is will write a disc  
in th e proper form at for Win dows 3.x an d DOS users. Follow th e  
in struction s given in th e section “How to Make a Copy of a CD” on  
page 8-3 to accom plish th is task.  
NOTE: CDs created with CD Copier will display long filenames when viewed in  
Windows 95 and NT. When viewed in Windows 3.x and DOS, file names are  
shortened to the DOS standard of eight characters with a three-character  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Sharing CDs across Different Formats  
extension. Files and executables that expect a specific file name may not  
function as anticipated in Windows 3.x and DOS.  
W h a t if I u sed Ea sy CD Au d io t o cr ea t e m y CD-R d isc?  
Th is application autom atically writes th e audio form at un derstood by  
m illion s of car an d h om e CD players in existen ce today. You will be able  
to sh are th is disc with virtually an y user.  
Ar e t h er e a n y ot h er w a ys t o cr ea t e CD-R d iscs?  
Use a CD-m asterin g application , such as Adaptecs Easy-CD Creator. A  
m asterin g application , wh en used with CD-R m edia, is capable of directly  
writin g discs usin g a form at th at can be read by virtually all CD-ROM  
drives an d operatin g system s (Win dows95, Win dows NT, Win dows 3.x,  
an d DOS).  
Interchange Summary  
Th e followin g table is a brief sum m ary of wh ich CD drives can read discs  
created with certain application /m edia com bin ation s.  
Application  
Type of CD  
used to  
Drives th at can read th e CD  
used  
m ake a CD  
DirectCD  
CD-RW  
MultiRead CD-ROM with UDF  
reader  
Win dows 95 an d NT 4.0  
CD-R  
*Most CD-ROMs  
(closed)  
Win dows 95 an d NT 4.0  
CD Copier  
CD-RW  
CD-R  
MultiRead CD-ROM  
An y CD-ROM  
Easy-CD Audio  
CD-RW  
CD-R  
MultiRead CD-ROM  
An y CD-ROM, h om e or car CD  
player  
Easy-CD  
Creator  
CD-RW  
CD-R  
MultiRead CD-ROM  
An y CD-ROM  
* Your CD-ROM drive m ust be capable of readin g packet-written CDs. Most CD-ROM drives  
are packet toleran t. If you h ave problem s, ch eck your drives docum en tation or con sult th e  
drives m an ufacturer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 5:  
Ma kin g Da t a CDs  
To m ake data CDs, you can use DirectCD. DirectCD provides a way to  
write files directly to a CD-Recordable (CD-R) or CD-ReWritable (CD-RW)  
disc, m uch like you would to a floppy diskette or rem ovable drive.  
With DirectCD you can read an d write files directly to your CD with an y  
software application th at can read an d write to a drive letter. Som e  
exam ples in clude:  
Software application s such as Microsoft Word, wh en you use th e  
Saveor Save Ascom m an ds  
Win dows Explorer, wh en you drag an d drop files  
®
Win dows 95 /NT, wh en you use th e Send Tocom m an d  
MS-DOS, wh en you use com m an d prom pts from with in  
Win dows 95/NT  
DirectCD provides a file system based on UDF v.1.5 an d writes data to th e  
CD-R or CD-RW disc usin g packet-writin g tech n ology. Th is file system  
gives you drive letter access to your CD-RW drive.  
DirectCD in cludes a wizard th at guides you step-by-step th rough th e  
process of preparin g an d ejectin g CD-R an d CD-RW discs.  
Uses for DirectCD  
DirectCD is th e easiest way to save data files directly to CD. Uses for  
DirectCD in clude:  
Arch ivin g data  
Backin g up a h ard drive  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
Starting DirectCD  
Dissem in atin g in form ation to field offices  
Tran sferrin g an d distributin g data to oth er Win dows 95 system s  
Starting DirectCD  
To start DirectCD so you can begin writin g data to your CD:  
Double-click th e CD-RW drive icon  
taskbar.  
on th e righ t side of th e  
Th e DirectCD Wizard appears an d guides you step-by-step to prepare th e  
CD so you can write data directly to it.  
Writing Data to a CD the First Time  
Before you can write data directly to your CD, you m ust first form at th e  
CD. To do so, follow th ese steps:  
1. In sert a blan k CD in to your CD-RW drive.  
2. Double-click th e CD-RW drive icon  
on th e taskbar.  
Th e Adaptec DirectCD Wizard win dow appears.  
3. Click Next.  
4. If you h ave m ore th an on e CD-R or CD-RW drive, select th e CD-R drive  
con tain in g th e blan k CD an d click Next.  
5. In th e Form at Disc win dow, select th e option th at says:  
I will be usin g DirectCD to read an d write th e CD th rough th e  
drive letter associated with th e CD-R drive.  
NOTE: Formatting a blank CD-RW disc may take approximately one hour.  
Formatting a CD-RW disc also requires additional space on the disc (up to 100  
MB or more). Thus, CD-RW discs have less than 500 MB of available space  
while CD-R discs can store over 600 MB of data.  
6. Click Next to con tin ue.  
7. Type in th e n am e you wan t to call your CD in th e Volum e In form ation  
win dow an d click Fin ish .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting DirectCD  
5-3  
Th e DirectCD Disc Ready win dow appears wh en th e form attin g is  
com plete.  
8. Click OK.  
Th e DirectCD disc is ready for you to write in form ation directly to th e  
CD.  
Adding Data to a DirectCD Disc  
On ce your CD is form atted as a DirectCD disc, th ere are a n um ber of  
ways to add data to it:  
Drag an d drop files from Win dows Explorer on to th e CD-RW drive  
icon .  
Select Save As from a Win dows 95/NT application File m en u an d  
select th e drive letter of your CD-RW drive.  
Use th e Sen d To com m an d.  
Use MS-DOS com m an d prom pts from a DOS win dow in  
Win dows 95/NT.  
Ejecting a DirectCD Disc  
Wh en you eject a DirectCD disc from your CD-RW drive an d you wan t to  
con tin ue readin g th e CD on your com puter usin g your CD-RW drive or  
an oth er CD-R system th at supports DirectCD, th e disc m ust be form atted  
so you can con tin ue usin g DirectCD. Wh en you eject a disc, DirectCD  
autom atically form ats it for you. To eject a DirectCD disc, follow th ese  
steps:  
1. Righ t-click th e CD-RW drive icon  
on th e taskbar.  
2. Select Eject from th e drop-down list box.  
DirectCD ejects your CD from th e CD-RW drive.  
Writing More Data to a DirectCD Disc  
To add m ore data to your DirectCD disc—m ean in g th at you h ave  
previously form atted a blan k CD for DirectCD use—you can add m ore  
in form ation to it un til th e disc is full. To do so, follow th ese steps:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
Erasing the Contents on a DirectCD Disc  
1. In sert th e DirectCD disc in to your CD-RW drive.  
2. Wait for th e DirectCD Disc Ready win dow to appear.  
3. Click OK an d con tin ue writin g m ore data to your CD.  
Erasing the Contents on a DirectCD Disc  
If you are usin g CD-RW discs an d a CD-RW drive, you can erase th e  
con ten ts on th e CD so you can rewrite n ew in form ation to th e CD.  
However, if you delete files from a CD-R disc, th e files becom e in visible to  
th e file system (such as Win dows Explorer) but are n ot actually erased  
from th e disc. Deletin g files from a CD-R disc does not in crease th e  
available space on th e disc.  
To erase th e con ten ts on a DirectCD disc, follow th ese steps:  
1. Wh ile in Win dows Explorer, select th e file(s) you wan t to erase.  
2. Select Delete from th e File m en u.  
3. Click Yes to con firm th at you wan t to erase th e files from th e CD.  
DirectCD erases th e selected file(s) from th e CD.  
Getting Help  
For set-up an d con n ection problem s with your CD-RW drive, refer to th e  
Troublesh ootin g section of th e h ardware guide.  
For in form ation about DirectCD, in cludin g DirectCD properties, refer to  
th e appropriate topics in th e On lin e Help. To access th e DirectCD  
On lin e Help:  
Click Help on an y of th e DirectCD Wizard win dows  
If you n eed furth er assistan ce, please con tact Adaptec. Th e in form ation  
an d support services we offer are described in th e Custom er Support  
section at th e en d of th is m an ual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 6:  
Ma kin g Mu sic CDs  
A m usic CD is a com pact disc (CD) con tain in g digital audio tracks  
recorded in th e Com pact Disc-Digital Audio (CD-DA) form at.  
Music CDs can store up to 74 m in utes of m usic an d m ay con tain up to 99  
tracks, each usually represen tin g a separate piece of m usic. Music CDs  
can be played back from a h om e or car CD player or from a CD-ROM  
drive th rough speakers or h eadph on es attach ed to th e drives output jack.  
Usin g Easy-CD Audio, you can :  
Com pile audio CDs of your favorite m usic  
Make CDs from Wave files on your h ard drive  
Starting Easy-CD Audio  
To start Easy-CD Audio so you can begin m akin g your own m usic CDs,  
follow th ese steps:  
1. In Win dows 95, click th e Start button located on th e left side of th e  
taskbar.  
2. Select Program s, poin t to HP CD-Writer Plus, an d select Make Music  
CDs.  
Th e Easy-CD Audio Wizard win dow appears.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
How to Make a Music CD  
How to Make a Music CD  
To m ake an audio CD, you can record son gs from :  
Tracks on an existin g CD  
Wave files stored on your h ard drive (*.wav, a stan dard Win dows  
form at for soun d files.)  
A com bin ation of Wave files an d tracks  
NOTE: Easy-CD Audio is designed to assist you in reproducing material in  
which you own the copyright or have obtained permission to copy from the  
copyright owner. Unless you own the copyright or have permission to copy from  
the copyright owner, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to  
payment of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights,  
contact your legal advisor.  
Using the Wizard  
Th e easiest way to m ake a m usic CD is usin g th e Easy-CD Audio Wizard.  
Th e Wizard appears wh en you first start Easy-CD Audio an d guides you  
step-by-step to m ake a sim ple m usic CD. To use th e Wizard, follow th ese  
steps:  
1. Start Easy-CD Audio.  
Th e Easy-CD Audio Wizard win dow appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Music CD  
6-3  
2. Follow th e on -screen in struction s in th e Wizard win dows.  
A list of th e audio tracks you are addin g to your CD appears in th e m ain  
Easy-CD Audio win dow. A fin al m essage box n otifies you wh en th e  
recordin g is com plete.  
Recording Audio Tracks from an Existing  
Music CD  
To record son gs (audio tracks) from an existin g m usic CD, you n eed to  
first create a CD layout— a file th at con tain s th e list of son gs an d th e  
order in wh ich th ey will be recorded—th en record th e layout to a blan k  
CD. To do so, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select New CD Layout from th e File m en u or open an existin g CD  
layout.  
2. Click th e Audio CD Layout tab:  
Windows Explorer  
Audio CD Layout Window  
Th e top part of th e win dow is Win dows Explorer, wh ere you can select  
th e son gs you wan t to record. Th e bottom part is th e Audio CD Layout  
win dow, wh ich allows you to view th e con ten ts of th e CD layout. To  
m ake ch an ges to th e list of tracks in th e Audio CD Layout tab, see  
“Ch an gin g th e Order of Your Songs” on page 6-7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
How to Make a Music CD  
3. In sert th e source CD, wh ich con tain s th e son gs you wan t to record, in to  
your CD-RW drive.  
NOTE: You can record directly from a CD-ROM drive only if it supports digital  
audio extraction. See Recording from a CD-ROM Drive” in the Easy-CD Audio  
Online Help.  
4. In th e Explorer section of th e win dow, select th e drive wh ere th e source  
CD is located to view th e list of son gs on th e CD.  
5. Drag th e son gs th at you wan t to record from Explorer to th e Audio CD  
Layout win dow.  
To ch an ge th e n am e of a son g, see “Ren am in g Son gs in Your CD Layout”  
on page 6-8.  
6. Repeat steps 3-5 for each existin g m usic CD from wh ich you wan t to  
record son gs.  
7. Select Create CD from th e File m en u wh en you h ave placed all of th e  
son gs th at you wan t to record in to th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
Th e CD Creation Setup box appears.  
8. Make ch an ges, if an y, to th e CD Creation Setup settin gs (see “CD  
Creation Setup Settin gs” in th e Easy-CD Audio On lin e Help for  
description s) an d click OK.  
Easy-CD Audio begin s recordin g your CD layout to a blan k CD. In sert a  
blan k CD wh en prom pted. A fin al m essage box n otifies you wh en th e  
recordin g is com plete.  
NOTE: To make a sleeve that lists the artist, CD title, and songs, see ”Chapter  
7: Making Inserts and Labels”.  
Recording Wave Files Stored on Your Hard  
Drive  
To record a m usic CD usin g Wave files (*.wav), th e Wave files m ust be  
stored on your h ard drive at 11, 22, 44.1 KHz, 8- or 16-bit, m on o or  
stereo. To m ake a Wave file from an existin g CD, see “Pre-recordin g  
Audio Tracks to Wave Files” on page 6-5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Music CD  
6-5  
To record Wave files stored on your h ard drive to a blan k CD, follow  
th ese steps:  
1. In sert a blan k CD in to your CD-RW drive.  
2. Select New CD Layout from th e File m en u or open an existin g layout.  
3. Click th e Audio CD Layout tab.  
4. Select th e Wave files you wan t to record from Explorer an d drag th em to  
th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
5. To ch an ge th e n am e of th e son g(s) see “Ren am in g Son gs in Your CD  
Layout” on page 6-8.  
6. Select Create CD from th e File m en u wh en you h ave fin ish ed addin g all  
of th e son gs you wan t to record to your CD layout.  
Th e CD Creation Setup box appears.  
7. Make ch an ges, if an y, to th e CD Creation Setup settin gs (see “CD  
Creation Setup Settin gs” in th e Easy-CD Audio On lin e Help for  
description s) an d click OK.  
Easy-CD Audio begin s recordin g your CD layout to a blan k CD. A fin al  
m essage box n otifies you wh en th e recordin g is com plete.  
NOTE: To make a sleeve that lists the artist, CD title, and songs, see ”Chapter  
7: Making Inserts and Labels”.  
Pre-recording Audio Tracks to Wave Files  
Pre-recordin g audio tracks to Wave files on your h ard drive is a way to:  
Min im ize swappin g CDs in an d out of your drive if you wan t to m ake  
m ore th an on e copy  
Add soun d effects to custom ize th e son g (use a th ird-party soun d  
editor)  
Im prove th e soun d quality if your CD recordin g system is less th an  
optim al  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
How to Make a Music CD  
You can pre-record on e Wave file at a tim e. To pre-record a Wave file from  
an existin g CD, follow th ese steps:  
1. In sert th e source CD, wh ich con tain s th e son g you wan t to pre-record to  
your h ard drive, in to your CD recorder.  
2. Click th e Audio CD Layout tab.  
3. Select th e audio track you wan t to pre-record from Explorer an d drag it  
in to th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
4. High ligh t th e audio track in th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
5. Select Pre-record to WAV file from th e Track m en u.  
NOTE: Pre-recording audio tracks to Wave files requires approximately 10MB  
of space on your hard drive for one minute of music.  
6. Type in a file n am e for th e Wave file an d ch oose a differen t location on  
your h ard drive if you do n ot wan t to record your Wave file to your Tem p  
directory.  
7. Click Save.  
Easy-CD Audio pre-records your Wave file to your h ard drive. A fin al  
m essage box n otifies you wh en th e recordin g is com plete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Your CD Layout  
6-7  
Combining Both Audio Tracks and Wave Files  
You can m ake a m usic CD th at con tain s son gs both from pre-recorded  
Wave files stored on your h ard drive an d from audio tracks on an existin g  
m usic CD. To do so, follow th e steps outlin ed in “Recordin g Audio Tracks  
from an Existin g Music CD” on page 6-3 an d “Recordin g Wave Files  
Stored on Your Hard Drive” on page 6-4, depen din g on th e type of son gs  
you wan t to record. On ce you h ave added all of th e audio tracks an d  
Wave files you wan t to record to your CD layout, select Create CD from  
th e File m en u.  
Modifying Your CD Layout  
Th e followin g section s describe h ow to m ake ch an ges to your CD layout.  
Changing the Order of Your Songs  
On ce you h ave added m ore th an on e son g to your CD layout, you can  
ch an ge th e order of th e son gs at an y tim e before creatin g th e CD.  
To ch an ge th e order of th e son gs, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select th e son g wh ose order you wan t to ch an ge in th e CD layout.  
2. Drag it to th e position you wan t it to appear in th e Audio CD Layout  
win dow.  
Removing Songs from Your CD Layout  
You can rem ove an y son g you h ave added to a CD layout at an y tim e  
before you create a CD. To rem ove a son g from your CD layout, follow  
th ese steps:  
1. Select th e son g you wan t to rem ove in th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
2. Select Cut from th e Edit m en u.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
Playing Music CDs  
Renaming Songs in Your CD Layout  
To ren am e a son g listed in your CD Layout, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select th e son g you wan t to ren am e in th e Audio CD Layout win dow.  
2. Select Ren am e in th e Track m enu.  
3. Type in th e n ew n am e in th e text box.  
Saving a CD Layout  
You can create a CD layout, save it, th en use it to record a CD later. To  
save a CD layout, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select Save As from th e File m en u.  
2. Type in th e File n am e.  
3. Select th e location wh ere you wan t to store th e file.  
Opening an Existing CD Layout  
To open a CD layout you h ave previously saved:  
Select Open CD Layout from th e File m en u.  
Easy-CD Audio displays th e con ten ts of th e layout.  
Playing Music CDs  
Use th e Win dows 95 CD Player to listen to m usic CDs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Help  
6-9  
Getting Help  
For setup an d con n ection problem s with your CD-RW drive, refer to th e  
Troublesh ootin g section of th e h ardware guide.  
For in form ation about Easy-CD Audio refer to th e appropriate topics in  
th e On lin e Help. To access th e Easy-CD Audio On lin e Help:  
Select Help Topics from th e Help m en u.  
If you n eed furth er assistan ce, please con tact Adaptec. Th e in form ation  
an d support services we offer are described in th e Custom er Support  
section at th e en d of th is m an ual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 7:  
Ma kin g In ser t s a n d  
La b els  
A jewel case in sert is a cover you can prin t an d in sert in th e CDs jewel  
caseth e plastic case th at h olds th e CD—to in dicate th e title an d  
con ten ts of your CD.  
Th e cover is prin ted on on e side of a sh eet of paper an d th en folded. On e  
side lists th e files or tracks an d th e oth er side sh ows th e title an d m ay also  
con tain graph ics.  
Easy-CD Audio allows you to custom ize your own jewel case in sert. On ce  
you h ave edited th e jewel case in sert, you can preview it, prin t it, cut it to  
size, an d in sert it in th e case.  
You can also design an d prin t a label for th e top of th e CD. You can use a  
stan dard prin ter if you use special paper design ed for disc labels.  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
Starting Jewel Case Designer  
Starting Jewel Case Designer  
Th ere are two ways to start th e Jewel Case Design er:  
1. In Win dows 95, click th e Start button , select Program s, poin t to HP  
CD-Writer Plus, an d select Make In serts an d Labels.  
2. If you are already in Easy-CD Audio, click th e Jewel Case Layout tab.  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
Wh en you m ake a m usic CD, Easy-CD Audio uses th e CD layout  
in form ation to create a basic jewel case in sert, in cludin g th e CD title,  
artist n am e, an d list of son gs. You can th en click th e Jewel Case Layout  
tab to m odify an d custom ize th at in form ation , such as ch an gin g fon t  
styles an d addin g graph ics.  
Wh en you m ake a data CD, you can select Make In serts an d Labels from  
th e program group to create your own custom jewel case in sert.  
Creatin g custom jewel case in serts in volves th ree basic procedures:  
Editin g in serts  
Addin g text an d graph ics  
Prin tin g  
Th e followin g section s explain h ow to view an d edit in serts, add text an d  
graph ics, an d prin t jewel case in serts.  
Editing Inserts  
Th e followin g section s describe th e differen t ways you can view an d edit  
jewel case in serts before prin tin g th em .  
Viewing Inserts  
To view th e differen t parts (pages) of th e jewel case in sert, follow th ese  
steps:  
1. Click th e Jewel Case Layout tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
7-3  
2. From th e Page m en u, select th e part of th e in sert you wan t to view:  
Jewel Fron tto view th e In side Jacket an d Fron t Cover  
Jewel Backto view th e Back Cover  
Disc Prin terto view th e Com pact Disc label  
Easy-CD Audio displays th e view.  
Zooming  
To view a section of an in sert page in greater detail, you can m agn ify th e  
view. To ch an ge th e m agn ification of th e page, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select Zoom from th e Page m en u.  
2. Select th e zoom level you wan t to apply.  
3. Click OK.  
Easy-CD Audio ch an ges th e m agn ification level.  
Using Rulers and Grids  
You can use rulers an d grids to position text an d graph ics on your jewel  
case in sert. See “Settin g In sert Layout Option s” in th e Easy-CD Audio  
On lin e Help to defin e your preferen ces.  
Usin g Ru ler s  
Rulers are displayed alon g th e perim eter of th e Jewel Case Layout  
win dow an d h elp you to m easure th e in sert an d its objects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
To display or h ide th e rulers, do th e followin g:  
Select th e Ruler option from th e View m en u to view rulers.  
Deselect th e Ruler option from th e View m en u to h ide rulers.  
Usin g Gr id s  
Grids h elp you to m ore precisely position objects on th e in sert with  
respect to oth er objects on th e ph ysical page.  
To sn ap objects to a grid—m ean in g th e objects are autom atically m oved  
to th e grid lin e—do th e followin g:  
1. Select Grid from th e Layout m en u.  
2. Select Sn ap to Grid from th e Layout m en u.  
Th e objects sn ap to th e n earest grid m arker wh en you m ove th em aroun d  
on th e page.  
To display or h ide th e grids, do th e followin g:  
Select th e Grid option from th e Layout m en u to view grids.  
Deselect th e Grid option from th e Layout m en u to h ide grids.  
Positioning Inserts  
You can position th e in sert at an y location on th e ph ysical page. For an  
approxim ate position , use th e box  
rulers.  
at th e in tersection of th e two  
To position th e in sert, follow th ese steps:  
Drag th e box at th e in tersection of th e ruler to th e position on th e  
page wh ere you wan t th e upper left corn er of th e in sert to be located.  
For m ore precise con trol over th e position of th e in sert, use th e Origin  
settin gs in th e preferen ces. See “Settin g In sert Layout Option s” in th e  
Easy-CD Audio On lin e Help.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
7-5  
Adding Text  
You can add as m uch text as you like to th e jewel case in sert. Wh en you  
add text, you can defin e som e attributes, such as fon t style, color, an d  
backgroun d fill color.  
To add text, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select In sert Text from th e Edit m en u.  
2. Type th e text in th e Text box.  
3. Select th e text attributes you wan t to use:  
Attribute  
Description  
Fill Color  
Select th e color you wan t surroun din g th e  
text.  
NOTE: Wh en text is m arked Tran sparen t—  
m ean in g th at you can see th e backgroun d  
beh in d th e text— you can n ot defin e a fill  
color.  
Text Color Select th e color of th e text.  
Fon t  
Select th e fon t, style, an d size of th e text.  
4. Click OK.  
Th e text is added wh ere th e cursor is located on th e Jewel Case Layout  
win dow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
Editing Text Objects  
To ch an ge th e attributes of an y text object in th e jewel case layout,  
follow th ese steps:  
1. Double-click th e text object you wan t to edit.  
2. Select th e text attributes you wan t to ch an ge. See “Addin g Text” on page  
7-5.  
3. Click OK.  
Adding Graphics  
Th e graph ics used in Easy-CD Audio are called OLE objects. OLE is a  
Win dows feature th at m ain tain s association s with objects across differen t  
application s. For exam ple, if you add OLE objects to in serts, you can  
double-click th e object to open th e associated application so you can edit  
th e object.  
To create an d in sert an OLE object, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select In sert New Object from th e Edit m en u.  
2. Select th e Create New option .  
3. Select th e application in wh ich you wan t to create th e object in th e  
Object Type drop-down list box.  
4. Click OK.  
Th e graph ic appears in th e Jewel Case Layout win dow.  
NOTE: See the Easy-CD Audio Online Help for information on editing and  
moving objects.  
Arranging Track Titles  
In form ation about tracks listed in th e Audio CD Layout is autom atically  
added to th e Jewel Case Layout win dow. If you delete tracks wh ile  
m akin g an audio CD, th e associated in form ation is autom atically  
updated in th e Jewel Case Layout tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Jewel Case Insert  
7-7  
Deletin g tracks wh ile m akin g an audio CD m ay cause blan k rows to  
appear in th e tracks list of th e Jewel Case Layout tab. Th erefore, if you  
m ake ch an ges to th e track list th at affect th e position of th e tracks on th e  
Jewel Case Layout win dow, Easy-CD Audio asks if you wan t th e tracks  
autom atically reposition ed.  
Th e Jewel Case Layout tab provides som e com m an ds th at let you create  
colum n s of track in form ation , display th e len gth an d n um ber of each  
track, an d autom atically position tracks on th e layout for better  
position in g.  
Th e followin g section s describe differen t ways you can arran ge th e tracks  
in th e Jewel Case Layout.  
Creating Track Column Lists  
You can arran ge th e track in form ation boxes:  
Ran dom ly by draggin g th em to n ew position s in th e Jewel Case  
Layout win dow, or  
In a lin ear list with on e or two colum n s.  
To create a track list:  
Select On e Colum n or Two Colum n from th e Text m enu.  
Displaying Track Numbers and Duration Times  
Easy-CD Audio in cludes th e track n um ber an d duration tim e for each  
audio track. Th e track n um ber in dicates th e order in wh ich th e audio  
tracks are recorded. Th e duration tim e is sh own in m in utes an d secon ds.  
To display th e track n um bers:  
Select Display Track Num ber from th e Text m enu.  
To display track duration tim es:  
Select Display Track Tim e from th e Text m enu.  
Fitting Tracks on a Page  
Fittin g tracks m ean s all th e track in form ation is cen tered on each page  
an d align ed alon g th e first ch aracter of each track.  
You can m ove track titles from th e in side jacket an d th e back cover to th e  
fron t cover. However, Best Fit will m ove tracks back to th eir origin al  
location .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8  
Getting Help  
To fit th e tracks on th e page as described above:  
Select Best Fit from th e Arran ge m en u.  
Printing Jewel Case Inserts  
You can prin t a jewel case in sert wh ile th e Jewel Case Layout tab is open .  
Th e com m an ds an d option s available for prin tin g depen d on th e type of  
prin ter th at is con n ected to your com puter. For in form ation about th ese  
option s, see your prin ters guide.  
To prin t a jewel case in sert or a disc label, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select Prin t from th e File m en u.  
2. Click OK.  
To preview an in sert before prin tin g it:  
1. Select Prin t Preview from th e File m en u.  
2. Click OK.  
Getting Help  
For setup an d con n ection problem s with your CD-RW drive, refer to th e  
Troublesh ootin g section of th e h ardware guide.  
For in form ation about m akin g jewel case in serts, refer to th e appropriate  
topics in th e Easy-CD Audio On lin e Help. To access th e Easy-CD Audio  
On lin e Help:  
Select Help Topics from th e Help m en u.  
If you n eed furth er assistan ce, please con tact Adaptec. Th e in form ation  
an d support services we offer are described in th e Custom er Support  
section at th e en d of th is m an ual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 8:  
Cop yin g CDs  
Th e m ost com m on use for m akin g a copy of a CD is to create a workin g  
copy of a CD an d arch ive th e origin al in a safe place.  
NOTE: CD Copier is designed to assist you in reproducing material in which  
you own the copyright or have obtained permission to copy from the copyright  
owner. Unless you own the copyright or have permission to copy from the  
copyright owner, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to payment  
of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact  
your legal advisor.  
What Kinds of CDs Can I Copy?  
Usin g CD Copier, you can m ake backup copies of alm ost an y type of CD.  
Th e followin g table lists th e types of CDs th at can be copied an d som e  
n otes about m akin g backup copies:  
Type of CD  
Notes  
Audio  
If you are usin g a drive oth er th an a CD-R or CD-RW  
drive, a source CD-ROM drive capable of readin g  
audio digitally is required. Not all drives support  
digital audio extraction . See “Testing Your System  
Con figuration ” in th e CD Copier On lin e h elp. (Easy-  
CD Audio tests your drive to determ in e its capabilities  
wh en th e source CD is in serted.)  
CAUTION: This release of CD Copier supports copying  
CDs in Track-at-Once mode. This means that there is a  
two-second gap of silence between tracks.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
What Kinds of CDs Can I Copy?  
Type of CD  
Notes  
DirectCD  
Discs  
Som e CD-ROM drives m ay n ot be able to read a  
DirectCD disc. If you h ave a CD-ROM drive th at is  
m ultiread capable, th ere sh ould be n o problem s.  
Mixed-Mode  
Mixed results. Som e CDs copy perfectly; oth ers do  
n ot, possibly because th e CD is form atted to  
circum ven t copyin g or because som e CDs do n ot  
follow th e stan dard specification s.  
CD Extra  
Ph oto CD  
Som e audio m ay be lost if th ere is less th an a  
two-secon d gap on th e source CD.  
Requires a source CD-ROM drive capable of readin g  
CD-ROM XA. Most curren t CD-ROM drives support  
th is.  
Video CD  
Requires a source CD-ROM drive capable of readin g  
CD-ROM XA. Most curren t drives support th is.  
Starting CD Copier  
You can open CD Copier from th e Start button in th e Win dows 95  
taskbar. To do so, follow th ese steps:  
1. In Win dows 95, click th e Start button located on th e left side of th e  
taskbar.  
2. Select Program s, poin t to HP CD-Writer Plus, an d select Copy CDs.  
Th e CD Copier Source an d Destin ation tab appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Make a Copy of a CD  
8-3  
How to Make a Copy of a CD  
To m ake a backup copy of a CD, follow th ese steps:  
1. Select th e source drive from wh ich you wan t to copy th e CD. Th is can be  
your CD-R, CD-RW, or CD-ROM drive. See “Source CD-ROM Drives for  
CD-to-CD Copyin g” in th e CD Copier On lin e Help if you are goin g to  
copy directly from a CD-ROM drive.  
2. Select th e destin ation drive th at con tain s th e blan k CD. Th is is your  
CD-RW drive.  
3. Make ch an ges, if an y, in th e Advan ced tab settin gs. See “CD Copier  
Advan ced Tab Settin gs” on page 8-4.  
4. Select on e of th e followin g option s:  
Test—Select th is option to perform a test in wh ich th e files to be  
recorded are passed to th e CD recorder. No in form ation is recorded to  
th e CD. Use th is option if you h ave m ade an y ch an ges to your CD  
recorder setup.  
Test & Copy—Select th is option to perform a test in wh ich th e files to  
be recorded are passed to th e CD recorder. Recordin g begin s after a  
successful test.  
Copy—Select th is option wh en you do n ot wan t to perform th e test.  
Use th is option if you h ave successfully recorded a n um ber of sim ilar  
CDs an d you h ave n ot m ade an y ch an ges to your CD recorder setup.  
5. Select th e n um ber of copies you wan t to m ake.  
6. Click Copy to begin recordin g a copy of your CD.  
7. Follow th e on -screen in struction s an d in sert a blan k CD wh en prom pted.  
CD Copier begin s copyin g th e files an d folders from your source to a  
blan k CD. A fin al m essage box n otifies you wh en th e copyin g is  
com plete.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4  
CD Copier Advanced Tab Settings  
CD Copier Advanced Tab Settings  
Settin g  
Description  
Curren t CD  
Recorder Speed  
Select th e speed at wh ich you wan t to create th e  
backup copy of th e CD. For greater certain ty,  
record at 1x.  
Disc Copy  
Select th is option to copy th e source CD to your  
h ard drive first to speed up th e recordin g process  
if you are m akin g m ore th an on e copy of a CD.  
On ce th e source h as been copied to your h ard  
drive, CD Copier records th e disc copy to th e CD.  
Select Location  
To m ake a disc copy, type in a differen t location  
to store th e im age file if you do n ot wan t to use  
th e Tem p directory.  
Getting Help  
For setup an d con n ection problem s with your CD-RW drive, refer to th e  
Troublesh ootin g section of th e h ardware guide.  
For in form ation about CD Copier refer to th e appropriate topics in th e  
On lin e Help. To access th e CD Copier On lin e Help:  
Select Help Topics from th e Help m en u.  
If you n eed furth er assistan ce, please con tact Adaptec. Th e in form ation  
an d support services we offer are described in th e Custom er Support  
section at th e en d of th is m an ual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 9:  
HP Sim p le Tr a x  
Welcome to HP Simple Trax  
HP Sim ple Trax protects your data by copyin g files an d folders to a CD  
an d savin g in form ation about th em in th e Sim ple Trax in form ation vault  
on your h ard drive. Th is m akes it easy for you to fin d an d retrieve an y  
protected version of a file you n eed.  
HP Sim ple Trax is design ed to work just th e way your Win dows Explorer  
works. You can drag an d drop item s or use th e m en us. You can also click  
on item s with th e righ t m ouse button to use th e popup m en us. Use your  
favorite m eth od or try a n ew on e.  
Th e in stallation program will place th e HP Sim ple Trax icon on th e  
desktop an d un der My Com puter. Wh en you open or explore th e Sim ple  
Trax icon , in stead of folders, you see icon s represen tin g all th e CDs you  
h ave used to protect your files with HP Sim ple Trax. You can see wh ich  
files an d folders are in each CD with out puttin g a CD in your CD-Writer.  
Retrievin g on e or m ore files or folders from a CD is a sn ap — just treat  
th e Sim ple Trax folder as a regular CD drive an d copy th e files usin g HP  
Sim ple Trax's h an dy popup m en us. HP Sim ple Trax asks you for th e  
correct CD(s) as n eeded to retrieve th e selected files.  
You don t h ave to log or track wh at is stored on your CDs, HP Sim ple  
Trax does it for you autom atically. You can create a list of im portan t files  
or folders th at you wan t to protect regularly an d even sch edule  
protection to take place autom atically wh en you are n ot usin g your  
com puter. It's th at easy to protect all your im portan t in form ation !  
With HP Sim ple Trax, your im portan t files are secure an d easy to retrieve.  
You can even retrieve older version s of files, allowin g you to un do m ajor  
revision s or ch an ges. HP Sim ple Trax also h elps you fin d th e file(s) you  
wan t to retrieve, in cludin g specific version s of a file, with its search  
option .  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2  
Protecting Files and Folders Immediately  
HP Sim ple Trax is in stalled alon g with your oth er CD-Writer Plus  
software. No special in stallation or con figuration is n ecessary. All you  
n eed to do before usin g HP Sim ple Trax is to prepare a CD for writin g  
with your CD-Writer Plus. Th e m eth od to prepare a CD can be foun d on  
page 5-2.  
Th is ch apter sh ows you h ow to:  
Protect files an d folders on CD  
Create a Protection List  
Sch edule a protection session to run autom atically  
Retrieve protected files an d folders  
Search th e HP Sim ple Trax in form ation vault  
Use th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el  
For m ore com plete in form ation on an y topic see th e on -lin e h elp.  
Protecting Files and Folders Immediately  
To p r ot ect files a n d fold er s im m ed ia t ely:  
1. Place th e CD you wan t to use to protect in form ation in to your CD-Writer  
Plus.  
2. Run Explorer by clickin g th e Start button , poin tin g to Program s, an d  
clickin g Win dows Explorer.  
3. Click th e file or folder you wan t to protect with th e righ t m ouse button .  
A popup m en u appears.  
To select m ultiple files or folders with in a sin gle folder, press an d h old  
th e CTRL key wh ile clickin g th e desired item s with th e left m ouse button .  
Th en release th e CTRL key an d click with th e righ t m ouse button .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Protection List  
9-3  
4. Poin t to HP Sim ple Trax an d click Protect... from th e HP Sim ple Trax  
m en u.  
Th e View Version s option on ly appears if you h ave selected a sin gle file.  
HP Sim ple Trax copies th e selected file(s) an d folder(s) to th e CD in your  
CD-Writer Plus an d places in form ation about th e protected files in to its  
in form ation vault.  
If th e CD you placed in your CD-Writer Plus h as n ot been used with HP  
Sim ple Trax before, th e program prom pts you to type a n am e to iden tify  
th e CD. Th is n am e is used on ly in th e HP Sim ple Trax in form ation vault.  
Be sure to write th e sam e n am e on th e CD label.  
NOTE: When you use Direct CD to write to your CD-Writer Plus directly, as  
described in chapter 5, HP Simple Trax does not save any information about  
this operation in its information vault. For HP Simple Trax to save information  
about the files you are protecting you must use the HP Simple Trax popup  
menus as described above, drag and drop to the HP Simple Trax icon, or copy  
and paste on the HP Simple Trax icon.  
Creating a Protection List  
Th e HP Sim ple Trax Protection List con tain s all files an d folders you h ave  
design ated for protection . You can th en sch edule a protection session to  
copy all item s in th e Protection List to a CD at on ce. Th is is a m uch m ore  
efficien t m eth od of protectin g your im portan t in form ation because it  
copies all design ated files an d folders in on e operation , savin g you tim e  
an d effort.  
To a d d files a n d fold er s t o t h e P r ot ect ion List :  
1. Run Explorer by clickin g th e Start button , poin tin g to Program s, an d  
clickin g Win dows Explorer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4  
Scheduling a Protection Session to Run Automatically  
2. Click th e file or folder you wan t to protect with th e righ t m ouse button .  
A popup m en u appears.  
To select m ultiple files or folders with in a sin gle folder, press an d h old  
th e CTRL key wh ile clickin g th e desired item s with th e left m ouse button .  
Th en release th e CTRL key an d click with th e righ t m ouse button .  
3. Poin t to HP Sim ple Trax an d click Add to Protection List from th e HP  
Sim ple Trax m en u.  
Th e View Version s option on ly appears if you h ave selected a sin gle file.  
HP Sim ple Trax places th e selected file(s) an d folder(s) in th e Protection  
List.  
4. Repeat steps 2 an d 3 for an y oth er files or folders th at you wan t to add to  
th e Protection List.  
To protect th e files an d folders in th e Protection List, use th e HP Sim ple  
Trax Con trol Pan el Sch edule Setup tab. See th e n ext section or th e HP  
Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el section later in th is ch apter for m ore  
in form ation .  
Scheduling a Protection Session to Run  
Automatically  
HP Sim ple Trax allows you to sch edule a protection session to run at a  
specified tim e on selected days. Sch eduled session s autom atically protect  
all files an d folders in th e Protection List so you don 't h ave to rem em ber  
to do so. You can even sch edule a protection session to run in th e m iddle  
of th e n igh t or an y oth er tim e your com puter is on but n ot in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scheduling a Protection Session to Run Automatically  
9-5  
For a sch eduled protection session to run un atten ded you will n eed to  
h ave a CD th at already h as a n am e for use in HP Sim ple Trax. If it is th e  
first tim e you use th e CD in HP Sim ple Trax th e software will prom pt you  
to type a n am e to iden tify th e CD wh en th e session begin s.  
To sch ed u le a p r ot ect ion session :  
1. Double-click th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el sh ortcut on your  
desktop or click th e Start button an d poin t to Program s, th en to HP CD-  
Writer Plus, th en to HP Sim ple Trax, an d select Con trol Pan el from th e  
HP Sim ple Trax m en u.  
2. Click th e Sch edule Setup tab. Th e followin g screen appears:  
3. Use th e row of button s alon g th e top of th is tab to select th e day(s) to  
perform a sch eduled protection session . Click th e desired day button (s).  
4. Set th e tim e you wan t th e sch eduled protection session to start on th e  
selected day(s).  
5. Select th e desired protection option :  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6  
Retrieving Protected Files and Folders  
All files in th e list: Protects every item in your Protection List,  
wh eth er ch an ged or n ot.  
On ly ch an ged files: Protects on ly th ose item s in your Protection List  
th at h ave ch an ged sin ce th e last protection session .  
6. Click OK to sch edule th e protection session .  
Be sure to place th e desired CD in your CD-Writer Plus before th e  
sch eduled protection session is set to begin . Sin ce th e first tim e you use a  
CD in HP Sim ple Trax th e program prom pts you to type a n am e to  
iden tify th e CD, m ake sure you h ave already used th e CD in HP Sim ple  
Trax for th e sch eduled protection session to run un atten ded.  
Leave your com puter on so th e sch eduled protection session can run .  
Click Run Now if you wan t to protect th e item s on your Protection List  
im m ediately. Th e protection session will still run as sch eduled.  
Retrieving Protected Files and Folders  
Retrievin g protected files an d folders usin g HP Sim ple Trax is very quick  
an d easy. You don t n eed to in sert a CD in to your CD-Writer Plus before  
th e retrieval actually begin s. HP Sim ple Trax sh ows you all th e files an d  
folders you h ave protected on all CDs an d prom pts you for th e correct  
CD(s) durin g th e retrieval process. Sin ce HP Sim ple Trax autom atically  
gives you th e m ost recen t version available of a file you m ay h ave to  
in sert a CD you didn t expect to.  
To r et r ieve p r ot ect ed files a n d fold er s:  
1. Run Explorer by clickin g th e Start button , poin tin g to Program s, an d  
clickin g Win dows Explorer.  
2. Double-click th e Sim ple Trax icon .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retrieving Protected Files and Folders  
9-7  
3. Double-click th e CD label for th e CD from wh ich you wan t to retrieve  
files or folders. Open th e folder con tain in g th e file(s) an d folder(s) you  
wan t to retrieve.  
If you do n ot kn ow wh ich CD con tain s th e files or folders you wan t to  
retrieve, click th e Tools m en u, poin t to Fin d, an d click In Sim ple Trax...  
to use HP Sim ple Trax Fin d feature.  
4. Click th e file or folder you wan t to retrieve with th e righ t m ouse button .  
A popup m en u appears.  
Th e View Version s option on ly appears wh en you righ t-click on a file.  
To select m ultiple files or folders with in a sin gle folder, press an d h old  
th e CTRL key wh ile clickin g th e desired item s with th e left m ouse button .  
Th en release th e CTRL key an d click with th e righ t m ouse button .  
5. Click Retrieve from th e popup m en u.  
6. Set th e retrieve option s:  
Make sure Ask before overwritin g files is ch ecked to preven t  
retrieved files from overwritin g existin g files of th e sam e n am es  
with out HP Sim ple Trax prom ptin g you to do so first.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8  
Retrieving Protected Files and Folders  
Make sure In clude subdirectories is ch ecked to retrieve all  
subdirectories in th e selected folder. (Th is option is useful on ly if you  
h ave selected on e or m ore folders.)  
Click Copy files to an altern ate location an d type th e desired drive  
an d path or click Browse an d select th e n ew location from th e list of  
folders on your h ard disk(s).  
NOTE: If you choose to retrieve the selected files or folders to an alternate  
location, all of the retrieved files are removed from the original folders and  
subfolders and are placed in the alternate location. If you want to keep the  
directory information either drag and drop the items or use copy and paste.  
7. Click OK to con tin ue.  
8. In sert th e correct CD if it is n ot already in your CD-Writer Plus. HP  
Sim ple Trax prom pts you for th e required CD.  
9. Con firm th at you wan t to replace existin g files, if prom pted to do so.  
HP Sim ple Trax retrieves th e m ost recen t version s of files th at you  
selected. In order to do th is HP Sim ple Trax m ay prom pt you for differen t  
CDs depen din g wh ere th e m ost recen t version was copied.  
TIP: If you are using multiple CDs disable the DirectCD banner.  
You can also retrieve earlier version s of a file usin g th e View Version s  
option . Th is option will brin g up th e File Protection History dialog box,  
wh ich lists all th e protected version s of th e file. Th e m ost com m on  
reason for retrievin g an older version of a file is to un do m ajor revision s  
or ch an ges.  
To display th e File Protection History dialog box run Explorer, click th e  
file on your h ard disk th at you wan t to exam in e with th e righ t m ouse  
button , poin t to HP Sim ple Trax on th e popup m en u, an d select View  
Version s. You can also double-click th e HP Sim ple Trax icon , click th e file  
you wan t to exam in e with th e righ t m ouse button , an d select View  
Version s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Searching the HP Simple Trax Information Vault  
9-9  
Th e File Protection History dialog box appears:  
To retrieve an older version of a file, click th e desired file version in th e  
File Protection History dialog box an d click th e Retrieve button . Older  
version s of a file can on ly be retrieved on e at a tim e.  
Searching the HP Simple Trax Information  
Vault  
HP Sim ple Trax h elps you fin d protected files in th e HP Sim ple Trax  
in form ation vault so th at you can see if a file h as been protected, see  
wh en it was last protected, an d retrieve it if desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10  
Searching the HP Simple Trax Information Vault  
To fin d p r ot ect ed files in t h e H P Sim p le Tr a x in for m a t ion  
va u lt :  
1. Run Explorer by clickin g th e Start button , poin tin g to Program s, an d  
clickin g Win dows Explorer.  
2. Double-click th e HP Sim ple Trax icon .  
3. Click th e Tools m en u, poin t to Fin d, an d click In Sim ple Trax... to  
display th e Fin d dialog box.  
4. In th e Nam ed box, type all or part of th e filen am e you wan t to fin d.  
You can use a file filter to search for files or folders based on n am e  
pattern s.  
A file filter is a gen eralized description of a filen am e com posed of a  
partial filen am e an d on e or m ore of th e wildcard ch aracters. Th e wildcard  
ch aracters take th e place of on e or m ore letters or n um bers to h elp you  
fin d a file wh ose n am e you do n ot kn ow or specify a group of files with  
sim ilar n am es. Th e wildcard ch aracters are:  
* = an y n um ber of ch aracters  
? = a sin gle ch aracter  
Exam ples:  
To fin d all files th at en d in .txt, type *.txt  
To fin d all files th at en d in .wp an d on e addition al ch aracter, type  
*.wp?  
To fin d all files th at begin with report an d h ave an y exten sion , type  
report.*  
5. To lim it th e search to a specific CD, drive, or folder, click th e desired CD,  
drive, or folder in th e Look in : box.  
6. Click Fin d Now to begin search in g.  
If you wan t to stop th e search click Stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP Simple Trax Control Panel Overview  
9-11  
If you do n ot kn ow th e n am e of th e file(s) or folder(s) you wan t to fin d,  
click th e Date tab to search th e in form ation vault for item s created,  
m odified, or protected durin g a specified period of tim e.  
Click a file with th e righ t m ouse button to retrieve it or view protected  
version s.  
Th e HP Sim ple Trax Fin d m en u provides addition al option s. Refer to th e  
on -lin e Help for com plete in form ation .  
HP Simple Trax Control Panel Overview  
Th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el provides access to m an y HP Sim ple  
Trax option s. Th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el h as th ree n otebook tabs  
th at organ ize th e available fun ction s:  
Selection : Th e Selection tab gives you full con trol over th e HP Sim ple  
Trax Protection List, allowin g you to add an d rem ove files an d folders  
as n eeded to protect your valuable in form ation .  
Sch edule Setup: Th e Sch edule Setup tab allows you to sch edule  
autom atic protection of all item s in th e Protection List.  
Error Logs: An error log is autom atically created durin g every  
protection or retrieval session wh eth er or n ot an error occurs. You  
m ay wish to con sult th e error log for addition al in form ation in th e  
even t th at an error m essage appears durin g an operation .  
To run th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el, double-click th e HP Sim ple  
Trax Con trol Pan el sh ortcut on your desktop or click th e Start button ,  
poin t to Program s, th en to HP CD-Writer Plus, th en to HP Sim ple Trax,  
an d click Con trol Pan el.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12  
HP Simple Trax Control Panel Overview  
Selection Tab  
Th e Selection tab gives you full con trol over th e HP Sim ple Trax  
Protection List, allowin g you to add an d rem ove files an d folders as  
n eeded to protect your valuable in form ation .  
Th e HP Sim ple Trax Con trol Pan el Selection tab is divided in to two  
section s:  
Ava ila b le Files  
Drive List: Ch oose th e drive you wan t to work with from th is drop-  
down list.  
Folder List: Click th e folder you wan t to open .  
File List: Displays th e files in th e selected folder th at m eet th e criteria  
specified by th e File Selection radio button s.  
File Selection Radio Button s: Con trol h ow files are displayed an d  
selected for protection . Th ere are th ree option s:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP Simple Trax Control Panel Overview  
9-13  
1. All Files & Folders: Selects all files an d an y subfolders in th e curren t  
folder for protection . Th e con ten ts of th e curren t folder appear in th e  
File List.  
2. File Type: Specifies th e type of files th at are selected for protection  
an d displayed in th e File List. Type th e desired file filter in th e  
accom pan yin g com bo box or select a file filter you h ave used before  
from th e drop-down list. On ly filters of th e form *.??? are allowed.  
Som e exam ples of th ese filters are *.bm p, *.doc, an d *.txt. Th e  
advan tage of usin g a file type wh en creatin g a Protection List is th at  
future files of th at type are autom atically in cluded.  
3. In dividual Files: Allows you to ch oose th e specific files to be  
protected from th e File List. Click th e desired file(s).  
Add to List Button : Adds th e selected files to th e Protection List.  
P r ot ect ion List  
Protection List: Con tain s all files an d folders you h ave design ated for  
protection . You can th en sch edule a protection session to copy all  
item s in th e Protection List to a CD at on ce.  
Rem ove from List Button : Click th e item s you wan t to rem ove from  
th e Protection List an d click th is button .  
Schedule Setup Tab  
Th e Sch edule Setup tab allows you to sch edule autom atic protection of  
all item s in th e Protection List.  
Th e con trols on th is tab are con tain ed in a sin gle group:  
Day of th e Week Button s: Use th is row of button s to select th e day(s)  
on wh ich to perform a sch eduled protection session . You can click as  
m an y days as desired. Th e selected day button s rem ain pressed. To  
rem ove a day from th e sch edule, click th e desired button .  
Option s: Th ese radio button s set th e protection option s.  
All files in th e list: Protects every item in your Protection List,  
wh eth er ch an ged or n ot.  
On ly Ch an ged files: Protects on ly th ose item s in your Protection List  
th at h ave ch an ged sin ce th e last protection session .  
Start Tim e: Type th e tim e at wh ich th e sch eduled protection session  
is to begin . Th e Start Tim e is th e sam e for all selected days.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14  
HP Simple Trax Control Panel Overview  
Run Now... Button : Click th is button to protect all item s in your  
Protection List im m ediately.  
Error Logs Tab  
An error log is autom atically created durin g every protection or retrieval  
session wh eth er or n ot an error occurs. You m ay wish to con sult th e error  
log for addition al in form ation in th e even t th at an error m essage appears  
durin g an operation .  
Th e con trols on th is tab are con tain ed in a sin gle group:  
Error Log List: Th is portion of th e tab displays in form ation about th e  
error logs an d allows you to select a specific error log so th at you can  
get m ore in form ation on an y errors th at occurred.  
View Button : Click th e error log you wan t to open an d click th is  
button . Use th is option to see th e details of an y errors th at occurred.  
Th e in form ation con tain ed in th e error log can h elp you solve th e  
problem .  
Delete Button : Click th e error log you wan t to delete an d click  
Delete.  
CAUTION: When you delete an error log, it cannot be restored.  
Keep last x error log en tries: Click th is radio button to set th e  
n um ber of error log en tries HP Sim ple Trax is to keep. Type th e  
n um ber of error logs to keep or use th e spin button s to set th e desired  
n um ber. Wh en th is n um ber is exceeded, th e oldest error log is  
autom atically deleted.  
Keep all error log en tries: Click th is radio button to keep all error log  
en tries. You can th en delete un wan ted en tries m an ually usin g th e  
Delete button .  
HP Sim ple Traxs seam less in tegration to Explorer m akes protectin g an d  
retrievin g your valuable in form ation easy. Sch edule protection session s  
of your im portan t docum en ts so th at th ey will always be available. Keep  
your h ard drive from gettin g cluttered by version s of files you th in k you  
m igh t wan t in th e future by protectin g th em with HP Sim ple Trax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 10:  
Ad ob e P h ot oDelu xe  
Welcome to Adobe PhotoDeluxe™  
Ph otoDeluxe software m akes it easy to be creative with your own  
ph otograph s. In stead of sim ply viewin g ph otos in fram es or album s, with  
Ph otoDeluxe you can use your ph otograph s to m ake calen dars, cards,  
an d T-sh irts, or to add a very person al touch to your gifts. An d youll  
h ave fun doin g it.  
Registration  
We are con fiden t th at you will fin d Ph otoDeluxe both fun an d  
rewardin g. So th at we can con tin ue to keep you in form ed about updates  
to Adobe Ph otoDeluxe an d offer you tech n ical support, please register  
your software by usin g th e on lin e registration software provided.  
Starting PhotoDeluxe  
In Win dows, click th e Start button , click Program s, click Ad obe, click  
Ph otoDelu xe 2.0, an d click Ad obe Ph otoDelu xe 2.0.  
NOTE: When using PhotoDeluxe, keep the HP SureStore Plus CD in your CD-  
ROM drive as much as possible. Although the CD is not required to use the  
program, you will need it when you want to use the sample photos and clip art  
or use the guided activities stored on it.  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2  
Learning PhotoDeluxe  
If You have Problems  
For solution s to problem s you en coun ter wh ile usin g th e program , see  
th e topic “Troublesh ootin g” in on lin e Help. For im portan t in form ation  
th at becam e available after th is book wen t to press, see th e Readm e file  
in stalled in th e sam e folder as Ph otoDeluxe.  
Adobe also provides tech n ical docum en ts th at address m an y problem s.  
Tech n ical docum en ts are freely available on th e Adobe System s World  
Wide Web site at http://www.adobe.com/supportservice/custsupport. Access  
to th e web site is on ly in En glish an d th ere is lim ited con ten t in oth er  
lan guages.  
Learning PhotoDeluxe  
Use th is guide to becom e fam iliar with th e process of editin g an d usin g  
ph otos in Ph otoDeluxe. For com plete in form ation about tools an d  
com m an ds, see th e com preh en sive on lin e Help topics. You can read  
on lin e Help topics at an y tim e by clickin g a Help button .  
NOTE: Help buttons appear in guided activity steps and in the toolbar. If you  
dont have a photo window open you can still use online Help by choosing a  
command from the Help menu.  
In addition to th is guide an d th e on lin e Help, th e docum en tation for th is  
program in cludes th e tour m ovie on th e HP SureStore Plus CD, wh ich  
dem on strates som e Ph otoDeluxe fun dam en tals. Th e m ovie is provided  
on ly in En glish .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Looking at PhotoDeluxe  
10-3  
Looking at PhotoDeluxe  
Ph otoDeluxe is organ ized so th at th e m ost im portan t tools are ready  
wh en you n eed th em . Step-by-step guided activities m ake projects easy.  
A. Buttons organize guided activities into categories. B. Introduction (Intro)  
tabs acquaint you with each section or guided activity. C. Numbered tabs  
guide you through steps in order. D. Clue cards guide you with information  
about a step. E. Square Help buttons provide specific information within  
steps. F. Round Help buttons display the table of contents for online Help  
where you can get information about any tool or command. G. The status  
bar tells you how much memory your photo uses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-4  
Getting a Photo into PhotoDeluxe  
Toolbar and Photo Organizer  
Youll fin d th e toolbar at th e top of th e ph oto win dow.  
A. Zoom In button magnifies an image. B. Zoom Out button reduces an  
image. C. Zoom tool magnifies the area you click or drag across. D. Zoom  
menu lets you choose a magnification. E. Trash Can button deletes the  
selected object. F. Object-order menu button provides options for  
overlapping objects. G. Text tool lets you add text to a photo. H. Help  
button opens online Help. I. Undo button reverses your most recent change  
to the photo.  
Wh en you use a gallery, or ph oto collection , th e ph oto organ izer appears.  
Th e ph oto organ izer floats above oth er win dows.  
Getting a Photo into PhotoDeluxe  
Adobe Ph otoDeluxe works with ph otos th at are already stored as digital  
files. If your ph otos are stored on your com puter, on a disk, or on CD, or  
if you are usin g a cam era or scan n er con n ected to your com puter, th en  
you are workin g with digital ph otos. If your ph otos are in th e form of  
prin ts, slides, or n egatives, th eyre n ot digital yet. You can m ake digital  
ph otos with a digital cam era, scan n er, video-capture device, or a digital  
ph oto-fin ish in g service. Ph otoDeluxe recogn izes m an y kin ds of digital  
ph oto files an d can work directly with m an y bran ds of scan n ers an d  
cam eras.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting a Photo into PhotoDeluxe  
10-5  
If you don t h ave an y digital ph otos yet, you can still use Ph otoDeluxe  
with an y sam ple ph oto from on e of th e ph oto organ izer galleries stored  
on th e HP SureStore CD.  
Using the Get Photo Button  
Th e Get Ph oto button gives you access to all of th e ways you can get a  
digital ph oto in to Ph otoDeluxe.  
To get a p h ot o:  
1. Click th e Get Ph oto button an d read th e in form ation un der th e In tro  
tab th at appears. Th en click th e Get Ph oto tab.  
2. Click th e button for th e location wh ere th e ph oto is com in g from . Its  
eith er on your com puter, on a disk, or youre about to create it usin g a  
con n ected device such as a scan n er, cam era, or video-capture device.  
Follow th e on -screen in struction s.  
3. As n ecessary, com plete an y dialog boxes th at appear. Th e option s th at  
appear vary depen din g on th e device youre usin g, so you m ay h ave to  
con sult th e in struction s th at cam e with th e device. Wh en you fin ish ,  
Ph otoDeluxe con verts th e ph oto in to its own file type to give it access to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-6  
Getting a Photo into PhotoDeluxe  
all th e features in th e program . Th e ph oto appears in th e ph oto win dow,  
ready for use in Ph otoDeluxe.  
If you get th e ph oto from outside Ph otoDeluxe, it open s as an un titled  
ph oto so its im portan t to save it righ t away. A quick way to do th is is to  
drag th e ph oto in to th e My Ph otos gallery in th e ph oto organ izer.  
4. Click th e My Ph otos button . Wh en th e My Ph otos win dow open s, drag  
th e ph oto th ere.  
Getting a Photo from the Photo Organizer  
Adobe Ph otoDeluxe com es with a ph oto organ izer th at appears as a  
floatin g win dow wh ere you can organ ize your ph otos. You can get or  
store ph otos by draggin g ph otos out of or in to th e ph oto organ izer  
win dow.  
Th e ph oto organ izer stores sets of ph otos in galleries. You can create your  
own galleries an d add or rem ove ph otos from th em . Ph otoDeluxe  
in cludes th e Sam ple Ph otos an d Clip Art galleries, wh ich you can fin d  
usin g th e Get Ph oto button . Un like galleries you create, th e Sam ple  
Ph otos an d Clip Art galleries are perm an en tly stored on th e HP SureStore  
Plus CD, so you can n ot ch an ge th em .  
To get a p h ot o fr om My P h ot os, Sa m p le P h ot os, or Clip Ar t :  
1. In sert th e HP SureStore Plus CD in to your CD drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Printing your Photos  
10-7  
2. Click th e Get Ph oto button , click th e Get Ph oto tab, an d th en click th e  
My Ph otos, Sam ple Ph otos, or Clip Art button . Th e gallery appears in a  
ph oto organ izer win dow.  
3. Drag a ph oto from th e ph oto organ izer win dow to th e Ph otoDeluxe  
win dow.  
NOTE: You can also just double-click a photo in the photo organizer window.  
Saving and Printing your Photos  
Wh en you fin ish workin g on a ph oto, you can sen d th e ph oto to your  
h ard disk, an oth er program or com puter, th e In tern et, or to a prin ter.  
Saving your Work  
Ch an ges you m ake to a ph oto occur on ly in your com puters RAM  
(tem porary m em ory) an d are n ot perm an en tly recorded un til you save  
th e ph oto to disk. Th erefore, as soon as you get a ph oto in to your  
com puter its a good rule to save th e ph oto im m ediately an d to save  
often , usually after an y successful ch an ge to th e im age. Th e m ost  
con ven ien t way to store ph otos is to drag th em to th e My Ph otos gallery  
in th e ph oto organ izer in cluded with Ph otoDeluxe.  
To m ove a p h ot o t o t h e p h ot o or ga n izer :  
1. If th e My Ph otos win dow isn t already open , click th e Get Ph oto button ,  
click th e Get Ph oto tab, an d th en click th e My Ph otos button .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-8  
Saving and Printing your Photos  
2. Drag th e ph oto to th e My Ph otos win dow.  
NOTE: If you are not using the Object selection tool, choose it before dragging to  
the My Photos window.  
To sa ve ch a n ges t o a p h ot o:  
With th e ph oto win dow open an d in fron t, ch oose th e Save com m an d  
from th e File m en u.  
Sending Photos to Another Program or  
Computer  
Ph otoDeluxe can package ph otos usin g an y of several file form ats,  
m akin g it easy to tran sfer ph otos to an oth er program or com puter.  
Differen t file form ats exist because each h as ch aracteristics th at work best  
for a specific purpose. For exam ple, th e JPEG form at works well for  
In tern et ph otos, an d th e TIFF form at works well for desktop publish in g.  
To p r ep a r e a p h ot o for u se in a W eb p a ge or e-m a il m essa ge:  
1. With a ph oto open , com plete an y activity you m ay be usin g, click th e  
Sen d button , an d th en click th e To In tern et tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving and Printing your Photos  
10-9  
2. Click th e button th at m atch es th e destin ation of your ph oto, an d follow  
th e in struction s on th e tabs.  
To sen d a p h ot o t o a file for m a t for u se in a n ot h er p r ogr a m :  
1. With a ph oto open , com plete an y activity you m ay be usin g, click th e  
Sen d button , an d th en click th e To Disk tab.  
2. Click th e Export button an d th en click th e 1 Export tab.  
Click th e button th at m atch es h ow th e ph oto will be used. Th e followin g  
list of typical uses can h elp you ch oose:  
To m ake a ph oto you can use on a World Wide Web page, click GIF  
Form at.  
To m ake a ph oto th at will prin t well from a desktop-publish in g program ,  
click Oth er Export, an d th en ch oose EPS or TIFF from th e Save As m en u.  
To m ake a ph oto readable on m an y kin ds of com puters an d over th e Web  
(usin g free Acrobat Reader software), click Create Acrobat File.  
To m ake a ph oto th at displays well on a system th at can n ot display m ore  
th an 256 colors, click In dex Color.  
To m ake a black-an d-wh ite version of a color ph oto, click Grayscale.  
To save in an oth er form at n ot already m en tion ed, click Oth er Export  
an d th en ch oose a file form at from th e Save As m en u.  
3. Specify a location an d filen am e for th e ph oto, an d click Save. After  
Ph otoDeluxe fin ish es savin g th e ph oto, click Don e.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-10  
Saving and Printing your Photos  
Printing a Photo  
You can prin t com pleted ph otos or projects with your prin ter. To prevent  
m istakes an d save paper, use Prin t Preview to ch eck th e size of th e ph oto  
on th e paper you selected an d con firm settin gs in Page Setup before you  
actually prin t.  
To ch eck t h e p h ot o size in P r in t P r eview :  
1. Click th e Sen d button at th e upper left corn er of th e screen . Click th e To  
Prin ter tab an d th en click th e Prin t Preview button .  
2. After th e ph oto appears on th e preview of th e prin ted page, see if th e  
en tire ph oto fits with in th e page boun dary. If it doesn t, you m ay wan t to  
use Page Setup to ch an ge th e page size or orien tation or use Ph otoDeluxe  
to resize or rotate th e ph oto so it fits.  
To ch eck P a ge Set u p op t ion s:  
1. Click th e Sen d button at th e upper left corn er of th e screen . Click th e To  
Prin ter tab an d th en click th e Page Setup button .  
2. Specify th e option s you wan t an d th en click OK.  
To p r in t a p h ot o:  
1. Click th e Sen d button at th e upper left corn er of th e screen , click th e To  
Prin ter tab, an d click th e Prin t button .  
2. Select th e option s you wan t from th e top h alf of th e Prin t box.  
NOTE: The Print Range option applies only to guided activities that create more  
than one page.  
3. Select a Ph otoDeluxe Output Quality settin g from th e bottom h alf of th e  
Prin t box an d click OK.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touching Up a Photo  
10-11  
To p r in t m u lt ip le cop ies on a sin gle p a ge:  
1. Click th e Sen d button at th e upper left corn er of th e screen , click th e To  
Prin ter tab, an d click th e Tiled Prin tin g button .  
2. Specify th e n um ber of copies you wan t on th e sam e page for Copies  
Across an d Copies Down an d th en click Prin t.  
Touching Up a Photo  
Not all ph otos are perfect righ t out of th e cam era. You can correct  
com m on ph oto problem s usin g th e Touch Up an d More Touch Up tabs.  
Th ey are located n ext to th e Get Ph oto tab so th at you can correct  
com m on problem s as soon as you start usin g a ph oto.  
To u se a Tou ch Up Act ivit y:  
1. Click th e Get Ph oto button , click th e Get Ph oto tab, an d open a ph oto  
usin g on e of th e available button s.  
2. Click th e Touch Up or More Touch Up tab.  
3. Click th e button for th e adjustm en t you wan t to use an d follow th e  
step-by-step tabs for th e button you clicked.  
4. Click th e step tabs in order an d click Don e wh en you com plete all of th e  
steps. Ph otoDeluxe displays Clue cards to h elp you th rough th e steps.  
NOTE: Remember to protect changes to your photo by saving it frequently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-12  
Adding Text  
Undoing Mistakes  
Ch an ges you m ake don t always look righ t th e first tim e. Use th e  
followin g strategies to correct m istakes in various situation s:  
You can un do th e m ost recen t ch an ge by clickin g th e Un do button on  
th e toolbar. Wh en you h ave a ch oice between clickin g Un do an d  
correctin g th e m istake m an ually, click Un do—it is faster an d will preserve  
m ore im age quality th an m akin g a secon d ch an ge over th e first.  
However, you can un do on ly th e m ost recen t ch an ge.  
If youve already m ade too m an y ch an ges to un do, but h ave n ot saved  
th e ph oto sin ce m akin g th e un wan ted ch an ges, ch oose th e Revert to  
Saved com m an d from th e File m en u.  
If youve applied a ch an ge but Ph otoDeluxe isn t fin ish ed processin g it  
(for exam ple, you see th e progress bar at th e bottom of th e ph oto  
win dow), you m ay be able to can cel th e operation by pressin g th e Esc  
key.  
To close a dialog box with out applyin g ch an ges, click Can cel. If you  
already clicked OK an d you don t like th e ch an ges, click th e Un do  
button .  
NOTE: To compare the two versions of a photo before and after you apply an  
effect, click Un do repeatedly. This alternates between the two versions.  
Adding Text  
You can add text to a ph oto usin g th e Text tool. You can color, m ove,  
resize, an d distort text. If you use PostScript® or TrueType™ fon ts, text  
stays sh arp an d sm ooth as you resize an d distort it. Wh en you sen d th e  
file to an oth er form at, text is in cluded with th e ph oto.  
NOTE: For text features to work properly in PhotoDeluxe, you must have  
installed Adobe Type Manager, which is part of the PhotoDeluxe installation  
process.  
To a d d t ex t :  
1. Click th e Text button ( ) on th e toolbar in th e ph oto win dow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Text  
10-13  
2. Type in to th e Text Tool box. Th e text autom atically goes to th e n ext lin e  
in th e text box, but will appear as a sin gle lin e in th e ph oto un less you  
press En ter wh ere you wan t to create a n ew lin e. In th is box you can  
select oth er option s, but you won t see th e effects of option s un til you  
click OK to close th e Text Tool box.  
3. Select th e typeface you wan t from th e Fon t list.  
4. Click th e Color swatch to select a color for th e text. Click OK wh en  
youre don e.  
5. Click th e Align m en t button th at looks like th e kin d of text align m en t  
you wan t. Th e bottom th ree option s align each lin e vertically in stead of  
h orizon tally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-14  
Exploring Advanced Features  
6. Click OK after you set th e option s you wan t. After clickin g OK, you can  
drag th e text to an y position with in th e ph oto.  
Th e text appears on th e ph oto surroun ded by a box with sm all black  
squares (called handles) on each side an d corn er. You can use th e h an dles  
to resize text.  
7. Drag an y corn er h an dle of th e text box. To resize on ly th e h orizon tal or  
vertical dim en sion of th e text, drag an y top or side h an dle (n ot a corn er  
h an dle).  
To ch a n ge t ex t t h a t a lr ea d y ex ist s in a p h ot o:  
Double-click th e text, m ake ch an ges, an d th en click OK.  
Exploring Advanced Features  
As you gain experien ce with ph oto editin g, you can go beyon d th e built-  
in guided activities. Ph otoDeluxe h as advan ced features th at en h an ce a  
guided activity wh en you wan t to do som eth in g com pletely origin al or  
wh en you are experien ced with oth er software program s. Th e quickest  
way to turn on Advan ced features is to click th e Advan ced button . Th e  
Advan ced features con sist of tabs of effects you can apply with out  
followin g steps an d addition al option s to th e m en u bar.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exploring Advanced Features  
10-15  
A. The Advanced button presents PhotoDeluxe features without guided  
activities so you can use them in any order. Clicking the Advanced button  
also displays long menus. B. To keep long menus on when the Advanced  
button is not selected, choose the Long Menus from the Preferences menu  
on the File menu. C. Normally, you can open only one photo window at a  
time. To use more than one photo window, choose the Allow Multiple  
Document Windows from the Preferences menu on the File menu. D. The  
online Help button in the photo window is available in both guided activities  
and in Advanced mode.  
Marking Areas with Selection Tools  
With Ph otoDeluxe, you can apply ch an ges to th e en tire ph oto or on ly  
part of it. Wh en you wan t to ch an ge just a part of a ph oto, you m ust first  
tell Ph otoDeluxe wh ich area to ch an ge. Wh en you use a selection , your  
n ext action ch an ges on ly th e part of th e ph oto in side th e selected area.  
Wh en you select an area, its border flash es to let you kn ow th at th e lin e  
you see is on ly a m arker an d n ot an actual lin e on th e ph oto. In step-by-  
step activities in wh ich selection is n ecessary, Ph otoDeluxe presen ts th e  
appropriate tool to you at th e step wh ere you n eed it. If you prefer to  
ch oose from all selection tools available in Ph otoDeluxe, use th e  
Selection s palette wh ich can be accessed un der th e View m en u.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-16  
Exploring Advanced Features  
NOTE: The view menu will only appear when long menus are activated. To  
activate long menus select File, Preferences, Long Menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 11:  
Cor el P r in t Hou se Ma gic  
Corel Prin t House™ is back, an d it's better th an ever! Welcom e to Corel  
Prin t House Magic™, a powerful suite of application s design ed to h elp  
you create excitin g prin tin g projects in n o tim e at all. Wh eth er it's for  
busin ess or h om e, Corel Prin t House Magic h as everyth in g you n eed to  
create cards, station ery, ban n ers, an d m ore. In addition , Corel Prin t  
House Magic is so easy to use; you'll be m akin g profession al-lookin g  
projects righ t from th e start.  
Corel Prin t House Magic in cludes th e powerful com bin ation of Corel  
Prin t House an d Corel Ph oto House™, an d a n ew an d excitin g tool to  
com plete th e Corel Prin t House team : in troducin g Corel Fam ily &  
Frien ds™, your own person al in form ation m an ager. Th is easy-to-use  
in form ation an d even t m an agem en t tool h elps you track th e h olidays,  
birth days, an d an n iversaries related to your Corel Prin t House projects.  
Th ere h as n ever been a m ore com plete, tim e-savin g solution to  
m an agin g person al even ts, lists, an d prin t jobs.  
Corel Prin t House Magic m akes creatin g colorful prin tin g projects easier,  
faster, an d m ore fun th an ever before. Regardless of th e occasion , Corel  
Prin t House Magic h as th e tools — all you n eed is your im agin ation . So  
h ave fun ! En joy Corel Prin t House Magic!  
What's in Corel Print House Magic?  
Ch eck out wh at's n ew an d im proved in Corel Prin t House Magic.  
Corel Print House™ 3  
If you've used Corel Prin t House before, you'll n otice som e excitin g  
ch an ges, such as  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2  
What's in Corel Print House Magic?  
n ewly design ed user in terface, in cludin g an on -screen Color Palette  
redesign ed Notebook, for easier access to all of th e Corel Prin t House  
features an d fun ction ality  
Sym bol tool, for drawin g all sorts of sh apes  
Sym bol Sprayer tool, for scatterin g sym bols as you drag your m ouse  
over th e page  
Zoom tool, for ch an gin g th e project view quickly an d easily  
th ousan ds of n ew sam ple files, an d 150 n ew fon ts  
Corel Photo House™ 2  
Now Corel Ph oto House™ h as even m ore features to h elp you m ake your  
projects picture perfect, such as  
expan ded Ph oto Library, for a wider selection of ph otos  
n ewly design ed user in terface, in cludin g an on -screen Color Palette  
redesign ed Notebook, for easier access to all of th e Corel Ph oto House  
fun ction s an d features  
Objects, a n ew category of ph otograph ic objects th at you can add to  
your im ages  
Fram es, a n ew category of im ages th at you can use to fram e your  
ph oto  
Zoom tool, for ch an gin g th e project view quickly an d easily  
special effects to tran sform your ph otos in fun an d in terestin g ways  
Corel Family & Friends™  
Corel Fam ily & Frien ds™ is an excitin g n ew addition to th e Corel Prin t  
House team . Th is easy-to-use tool provides a h an dy way of trackin g th e  
people an d even ts in your life. Corel Fam ily & Frien ds rem in ds you wh en  
it's tim e to create a greetin g card for a special occasion , stores addresses  
an d teleph on e n um bers, an d lets you create a list of your favorite books  
or recipes — all at th e sam e tim e! For m ore in form ation about Corel  
Fam ily & Frien ds, see th e Corel Fam ily & Frien ds section in th is m an ual.  
For in form ation about procedures, see th e on lin e Help.  
What You Need To Use Corel Print House Magic  
To use Corel Prin t House Magic, your com puter m ust h ave th e followin g  
as m in im um system requirem en ts: 486 DX cpu, a CD-ROM drive, an d an  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Print House 3  
11-3  
SVGA m on itor with 800x600 resolution . You m ust also h ave 45–65  
m egabytes of free disk space an d 8 m egabytes RAM (for Win dows 95) or  
12 m egabytes RAM (for Win dows NT).  
Corel Print House 3  
Corel Prin t House 3 m akes an y prin tin g job fun an d easy to do. Greetin g  
cards, ban n ers, letterh ead, station ery, calen dars, an d en velopes are on ly  
som e of th e projects you can create. In addition , Corel Prin t House Magic  
n ow in cludes two powerful tools to h elp you with your projects: Corel  
Ph oto House 2 an d Corel Fam ily & Frien ds. Corel Ph oto House offers a  
fun , yet powerful way to edit ph otos an d oth er bitm aps. Corel Fam ily &  
Frien ds, th e n ewest addition to th e Corel Prin t House team , can h elp you  
organ ize an d m an age all your Corel Prin t House project in form ation .  
Th ere are so m an y uses for Corel Prin t House, th e possibilities are  
en dless!  
Corel Prin t House is powerful, yet easy to use — even for begin n ers. You  
can use th e Notebook's Guided Activities page to walk you th rough each  
project step by step an d view h un dreds of sam ple projects. Custom izin g  
your work is m ade easy with th e colors, sh adows, an d clipart available in  
th e Notebook. More experien ced users m ay wan t to use th e drawin g an d  
editin g tools to create design s from scratch or edit clipart an d ph otos.  
Wh atever you n eed to prin t, you can use Corel Prin t House to m ake it  
easier, faster, an d m ore creative th an ever before. Get ready to experien ce  
th e m agic of Corel Prin t House!  
To st a r t Cor el P r in t H ou se  
1. Do on e of th e followin g:  
If you created a sh ortcut to Corel Prin t House on your desktop,  
double-click th e sh ortcut.  
In Win dows 95 or Win dows NT 4.0, click Start, Program s, HP CD-  
Writer Plus, Corel Prin t House Magic, Corel Prin t House 3.  
2. In th e Notebook, click th e m eth od you wan t to use to design your  
project.  
Start with a sam ple for th e fastest results. Th e Sam ple wizard lets you  
ch oose from a variety of project types, each with sam ple projects  
based on differen t th em es an d occasion s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4  
Corel Print House 3  
Start from scratch to build your project from th e groun d up. Th e  
Scratch wizard lets you ch oose from various blan k paper layouts.  
Th en , it's up to you to add text, clipart, an d oth er graph ics.  
Ch oose th e Open Existin g option to access an y project you h ave  
saved previously. To open your project, type th e n am e of th e file or  
ch oose it from th e list.  
Ch oose th e Open Last option to access th e project you saved th e last  
tim e you used Corel Prin t House. Th is option is n ot available th e first  
tim e you run Corel Prin t House.  
The Corel Print House 3 Desktop  
Th e desktop is wh at you see on your screen wh en you start Corel Prin t  
House 3. Th e followin g picture sh ows th e desktop an d iden tifies  
im portan t item s you m ay use to create your projects.  
Wh en you start Corel Prin t House, th e Property Bar sh own above is n ot  
displayed. To view it, click View, Property Bar. A ch eck m ark beside th e  
com m an d n am e in dicates th at th e Property Bar will display on your  
screen .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Print House 3  
11-5  
The Notebook  
Th e Notebook is located on th e left side of th e Corel Prin t House desktop.  
Use th e Notebook to  
access th e catalog of Corel Prin t House resources, in cludin g clipart,  
backdrops, borders, ph rases, an d ph otos  
get assistan ce with tasks such as addin g graph ics, editin g text, an d  
savin g an d prin tin g projects  
add color, lin e, sh adow, text, an d wrappers to your project  
Th e Notebook is m ade up of th ree m ain pages, each providin g access to  
oth er pages th at con tain m ore option s. To open a specific page, click its  
tab.  
The Toolbox  
Th e Toolbox h olds all th e tools you n eed to create an d edit design s.  
Th ere are tools to create sh apes, freeh an d objects, sym bols, text, an d  
tables. Th ey're easy to use — just click a tool to select it. On ce you select a  
tool, in struction s for usin g it appear on th e Guides page of th e Notebook.  
The Style Bar  
Th e Style Bar provides easy access to th e colorin g, lin e, sh adow, an d text  
styles. Sim ply click th e button for th e style type you wan t to apply. Th e  
Notebook autom atically displays th e correspon din g style page.  
From each style page, you can ch oose from a selection of preset styles or  
click th e Custom button to create your own style.  
The Property Bar  
Th e Property Bar displays th e properties of a selected text or sh ape object.  
Properties are attributes such as size, rotation , an d position . To change an  
object's properties, select th e object with th e Pick tool, th en click th e  
button on th e Property Bar th at correspon ds to th e attribute you wan t to  
ch an ge. As you switch from on e object to an oth er, th e Property Bar  
autom atically ch an ges to display th e available properties for th e selected  
object.  
The Color Palette  
Located on th e righ t side of your screen , th e Color Palette displays a wide  
selection of colors th at you can quickly apply to selected text or objects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-6  
Corel Print House 3  
By default, th e Color Palette autom atically appears wh en you laun ch  
Corel Prin t House. You can h ide th e Color Palette by clickin g View, Color  
Palette. Th e ch eck m ark beside th e com m an d n am e disappears wh en th e  
Color Palette is h idden .  
The rulers  
Rulers m easure th e size of th e page an d tell you th e exact location of your  
cursor. You can use rulers to h elp you resize or draw objects to specific  
dim en sion s or to m ove objects to a precise location on th e page. By  
default, rulers autom atically appear wh en you laun ch Corel Prin t House.  
To h ide th e rulers, click View, Rulers. Th e ch eck m ark beside th e  
com m an d n am e disappears wh en th e rulers are h idden .  
Corel Print House 3 Projects  
Th e projects th at you can create usin g Corel Prin t House 3 are divided  
in to th e followin g 11 categories:  
Greetin g Cards  
Special Projects  
Ban n ers  
Station ery  
Sign s  
Labels  
Kid Stuff  
En velopes  
Certificates an d Awards  
Men us  
Calen dars  
Each category h as m an y differen t sam ples to ch oose from . You can  
browse th rough th e sam ples by clickin g From Sam ple on th e New  
Project page of th e Notebook.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Photo House 2  
11-7  
Corel Photo House 2  
Welcom e to Corel Ph oto House 2, a ph oto-editin g an d bitm ap-creation  
program you can use with Corel Prin t House 3 an d oth er application s.  
Corel Ph oto House m akes it easy for you to touch up ph otograph s, add  
fun special effects to th em , or create your own bitm ap im ages usin g th e  
pain tin g tools. With Corel Ph oto House, you'll fin d th at takin g th e  
picture is just th e begin n in g — m akin g it better is h alf th e fun !  
Corel Ph oto House provides powerful ph oto-editin g an d pain tin g tools  
but is easy en ough for begin n ers to use. Wh en you n eed assistan ce, th e  
Notebook h elps you apply effects, ch oose a pain t brush , an d access th e  
Corel Prin t House ph oto collection quickly an d easily. For m ore  
flexibility, you can preview special effects before applyin g th em to your  
ph otos an d experim en t to get th e look you wan t. If you're plan n in g on  
pain tin g, you'll fin d th at th e pain t tools com e with a large selection of  
brush sh apes an d sizes to satisfy your creative n eeds.  
Wh eth er you're creatin g n ew im ages or brin gin g n ew life to old on es,  
your ph otos an d pain tin gs will look th eir best with Corel Ph oto House.  
To St a r t Cor el P h ot o H ou se  
If you created a sh ortcut to Corel Ph oto House on your desktop,  
double-click th e sh ortcut.  
In Win dows 95 or Win dows NT 4.0, click Start, Program s, HP CD-  
Writer Plus, Corel Prin t House Magic, Corel Ph oto House 2.  
Beginning your work  
Th ere are several ways to setup an im age for editin g or en h an cem en t in  
Corel Ph oto House. You can  
create a blan k im age an d eith er pain t an im age or create a m on tage  
with parts of oth er im ages  
use an existin g im age file. Corel Ph oto House allows you to open  
several file form ats.  
access your scan n in g software from Corel Ph oto House an d create an  
im age file from a ph otograph or drawin g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-8  
Corel Photo House 2  
Setting up the page  
Wh en you create a blan k im age, you set th e im age size an d resolution  
an d ch oose th e paper color. Th e im age's size an d resolution are  
particularly im portan t because th ey affect both th e size of th e file an d th e  
quality of your prin ted im age. If you're n ot sure of th e differen ce between  
im age size an d resolution , see “Im age size an d resolution ” in th e on lin e  
h elp.  
The Corel Photo House 2 Desktop  
Th e desktop is wh at you see on your screen wh en you use Corel Ph oto  
House 2. Th e picture below sh ows th e desktop an d iden tifies im portan t  
item s you use to create an d edit ph otos.  
If you prefer m ore space on your desktop, you can h ide th e Color Palette  
an d toolbar sh own above. To h ide th em , click View, Color Palette or  
View, Toolbar. A ch eck m ark n ext to each com m an d n am e in dicates th at  
th e item will display on your screen .  
The Toolbox  
Th e Toolbox h olds tools you can use to create an d edit bitm aps. Th ey're  
easy to use — just click a tool to select it. On ce you select a tool,  
in struction s for usin g it appear on th e Guides page of th e Notebook.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Photo House 2  
11-9  
The Notebook  
Th e Notebook is located on th e left side of th e Corel Ph oto House  
desktop. Use th e Notebook to  
get assistan ce with tasks such as usin g th e pain tin g an d selection tools  
ch oose brush es, colors, an d effects  
access th e ph otos available on th e Corel CD (n on -U.S. users sh ould  
use th e CD con tain in g th e appropriate lan guage)  
Th e Notebook is m ade up of th ree pages, each with differen t  
in form ation . To open a specific page, click its tab.  
The Color Palette  
Located on th e righ t side of your screen , th e Color Palette displays a wide  
selection of colors th at you can quickly apply to selected text or objects.  
By default, th e Color Palette autom atically appears wh en you laun ch  
Corel Ph oto House. You can h ide th e Color Palette by clickin g View,  
Color Palette. Th e ch eck m ark beside th e com m an d n am e disappears  
wh en th e Color Palette is h idden .  
Corel Photo House 2 Effects  
Effects can h elp you take ordin ary im ages an d ch an ge th em in  
extraordin ary ways. You can turn poor-quality im ages in to profession al-  
quality ph otograph s usin g th e Touch -Up effects, or you can brin g n ew  
life to old ph otos usin g th e Special effects.  
Experim en tation is th e key to un lockin g th e power of Corel Ph oto House  
2. Try several differen t effects before applyin g th em to your im age. Som e  
of th e m ore powerful effects take a little gettin g used to. Th e best way to  
m aster th e subtleties of th ese effects is to see h ow differen t settin gs affect  
your im age. Th e results are well worth th e effort.  
Touch-Up effects  
Th e Touch -Up effects are ideal for repairin g or en h an cin g th e appearan ce  
of ph otograph ic im ages. For exam ple, th e Brigh tn ess/Con trast effect lets  
you con trol th e balan ce of colors in h igh ligh ts an d sh adow — try usin g it  
on your overexposed or un derexposed ph otograph s. Th e Sh arpen effect  
can be used to brin g out in distin ct detail in older ph otograph s, an d th e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-10  
Corel Family & Friends  
Dust An d Scratch es effect can be used to im prove dam aged areas of  
im ages.  
Special effects  
Special effects let you tran sform your ph otos in fun an d in terestin g ways.  
Th ey can ch an ge im age colors an d textures, create th ree-dim en sion al  
effects, an d distort im age appearan ces. It's easy to com bin e effects to  
create differen t results.  
Plug-In effects  
Corel Ph oto House lets you in stall addition al im age effects created by  
oth er m an ufacturers. Plug-In effects work in th e sam e way as th e Touch-  
Up an d Special effects. You can access th em from th e Effects page of th e  
Notebook an d from th e Im age m en u.  
Corel Family & Friends  
Corel Fam ily & Frien ds provides a h an dy way of keepin g track of th e  
people an d even ts in your life. Wh eth er you wan t to sch edule activities,  
m ain tain address an d person al in form ation on fam ily an d frien ds, or  
create lists, Corel Fam ily & Frien ds can h elp you. Corel Fam ily & Frien ds  
in cludes th ree com pon en ts — th e Calen dar, th e Address Book, an d th e  
List Book. It also in cludes Corel Rem in ders, wh ich autom atically open s  
wh en you start your com puter an d displays th e day's even ts.  
Use th e power an d flexibility of Corel Fam ily & Frien ds to  
track upcom in g even ts, in cludin g h olidays, birth days, an d  
an n iversaries  
store addresses, ph on e n um bers, etc., an d m erge th em with your  
Corel Prin t House projects  
create lists of team m em bers, favorite CDs, gourm et recipes, an d m ore  
You can start Corel Fam ily & Frien ds from Corel Prin t House 3 by clickin g  
Tools, Laun ch Fam ily & Frien ds. You can also laun ch Corel Prin t House  
from Corel Fam ily & Frien ds by clickin g th e Corel Prin t House button  
on th e Corel Fam ily & Frien ds desktop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Family & Friends  
11-11  
Th e Calen dar h elps you sch edule even ts an d displays th em in th e  
fam iliar form at of a paper calen dar. However, it lets you add even m ore  
detail th an a paper calen dar. Th e Details win dow lets you display  
m essages about each even t you sch edule an d sh ows you h ow often th e  
even t repeats. Th e Calen dar also in cludes a Rem in der option to rem in d  
you about each even t in advan ce.  
Th e Address Book lets you keep detailed in form ation about your fam ily  
an d frien ds close at h an d. You can record each person 's address, birth day,  
an d an n iversary. You can also record th e h olidays you spen d togeth er,  
special n otes regardin g th at person , an d lists of item s, such as h obbies,  
relatin g to th at person .  
Th e List Book h elps you organ ize in form ation an d keep it accessible. You  
can create lists of person al item s, such as your CD collection , or you can  
lin k your list to th e Address Book. Wh en you create a lin ked list, you gain  
in stan t access to all of th e records an d in form ation in your Address Book.  
You can add an y of th ese records to your list. Wh en you do, all th e  
in form ation about th e in dividual or fam ily th at you en tered in th e  
Address Book autom atically becom es part of th e List Book record. You  
don 't h ave to retype a th in g!  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 12:  
P h ot o Or ga n izer  
Welcom e to Ph oto Organ izer—th e best way to create electron ic ph oto  
album s, catalog all th eir ph otos for easy retrieval, create In tern et web  
pages, an d laun ch popular “digital darkroom ” ph oto-editin g program s.  
Th e Ph oto Organ izer is in stalled autom atically with th e CD-ROM  
software.  
Getting Started  
Th is section explain s h ow to start th e Ph oto Organ izer an d load your first  
set of ph otos to th e Media Library.  
Starting the Photo Organizer  
To st a r t P h ot o Or ga n izer :  
1. Ch oose Start, Program s, Ph oto Organ izer, Ph oto Organ izer 1.1.  
2. Th e first tim e you load th e program , a screen in troduces th e Ph oto  
Organ izer Wizard, wh ich leads you th rough th e process of addin g digital  
ph otograph s to th e m edia library. Click Next to con tin ue usin g th e  
Wizard, or click Can cel if you prefer n ot to use th e Wizard. If you do n ot  
wan t to see th is page every tim e you load th e program , m ark th e  
ch eckbox beside Don t sh ow m e th is page again .  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2  
Getting Started  
Adding Photos to the Media Library  
Ph oto Organ izer can im port picture files from an y drive th at can be  
accessed by your com puter: h ard drives, floppy drives, CD-ROM drives,  
an d n etwork drives. It can also im port pictures directly from a scan n er.  
To a d d p h ot os t o t h e Med ia Lib r a r y:  
1. Click th e Get tab an d click an icon represen tin g th e im port source: Files  
(on a h ard drive), Com pact Disc, Floppy, Ph otoMail or Scan n er. You  
can also ch oose File, Im port Files or Action , Get from th e m ain m en u.  
2. A series of question s guides you th rough th e im port process for each  
source.  
3. Th e fin al screen in th e im port process selects th e destin ation for th e  
im ported pictures. Th e pictures can be placed on th e Ligh t Table, wh ich  
is a tem porary work space for organ izin g an d editin g pictures, or in an  
album . You m ay ch oose an existin g album or create a n ew album .  
Viewing Pictures  
Pictures can be viewed on four differen t tabs: Gallery, Presen ter,  
Catalog, an d Details. Th e differen t views can be accessed by clickin g a  
tab n am e at th e bottom of th e Viewer pan e or by ch oosin g View from  
th e m ain m en u.  
Gallery is th e default view. Pictures are displayed as th um bn ails.  
Presen ter displays en larged pictures, on e at a tim e. Th um bn ails of all  
pictures are displayed in a film strip. Display, rotation , an d n otes are  
con trolled usin g th e button s at th e bottom of th e win dow.  
Catalog displays a th um bn ail of each picture, alon g with th e picture's  
title, auth or, date created, com m en ts, keywords an d classification s.  
Every field, except th e file path , can be edited directly on th e screen .  
Details displays in form ation in a table form at, with n o th um bn ails.  
Each picture h as a row of in form ation .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
12-3  
Rearranging Pictures on the Gallery Tab  
To r ea r r a n ge t h e or d er of p ict u r es on t h e Ga ller y t a b :  
Click th e left m ouse wh ile draggin g a picture to its n ew location . To  
place a picture in fron t of an oth er picture, position th e m ouse poin ter  
on th e left side of th e picture.  
To place th e picture after an oth er picture, position th e m ouse poin ter  
on th e righ t side of th e picture.  
Viewing a Slideshow  
To view your pictures in a slidesh ow form at, ch oose View, Slidesh ow  
from th e m ain m en u.  
Each picture is displayed for a few secon ds. Use th e con trol button s to  
pause th e slidesh ow, view in dividual pictures, an d con trol th e slidesh ow  
properties.  
Pause th e slidesh ow. Visible on ly wh en slidesh ow is playin g.  
Play th e slidesh ow. Visible on ly wh en slidesh ow is paused.  
Display n ext picture.  
Display previous picture.  
Display first picture.  
Display last picture.  
Access slidesh ow properties.  
To return to Ph oto Organ izer, click th e Stop button .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-4  
Getting Started  
Creating Albums  
Album s are collection s of pictures. You can group pictures in to album s by  
subject, even t, or an y oth er criteria th at you ch oose. Pictures can be  
added to an album by scan n in g or im portin g, or by copyin g or m ovin g  
pictures from th e Ligh t Table or from oth er album s.  
To cr ea t e a n a lb u m :  
1. Select th e pictures on th e Ligh t Table.  
2. Click Album on th e Create tab.  
3. En ter a n am e for th e n ew album .  
4. Specify wh eth er th e pictures sh ould be m oved or copied to th e n ew  
album .  
5. Click OK.  
Creating E-Mail  
Pictures from th e Ligh t Table, an album , th e Trash , or Search Results can  
be used to create e-m ail m essages.  
1. Select th e pictures on th e Viewer pan e.  
2. On th e Create tab, click th e E-m ail icon .  
3. A series of question s will guide you th rough th e process of sen din g an e-  
m ail.  
4. Address your m ail m essage usin g th e postcard tem plate th at is provided.  
You can m an ually type th e e-m ail addresses of each recipien t or use th e  
address book. Type a subject an d th e text of your m essage in th e spaces  
provided.  
5. Wh en you are ready to sen d th e m ail m essage, click th e Sen d button .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
12-5  
Cataloging Pictures  
Pictures can be cataloged for later retrieval usin g th e Search tool.  
Keywords an d classification s are used to catalog pictures.  
Keywords are words or ph rases th at you create to iden tify pictures.  
Keywords th at are com m on to a group of pictures can be en tered durin g  
th e im port process. Keywords for in dividual pictures can be viewed an d  
edited on a pictures Catalog Properties sh eet.  
1. Classification s are pre-existin g labels th at are used to iden tify people,  
places, even ts, an d th in gs. Th e classification h ierarch y provided by Ph oto  
Organ izer sh ould be sufficien t to label m ost of your pictures. However,  
you can add n ew classification s if n ecessary.  
Classification s are assign ed usin g a pictures Classification Properties  
sh eet.  
Assigning Keywords  
To a ssign k eyw or d s:  
1. Select a picture by clickin g it.  
2. Click th e Properties button in th e bottom righ t corn er of th e screen or  
righ t-click th e picture an d ch oose Properties from th e Im age m en u.  
3. Click th e Catalog tab.  
4. En ter th e keywords in th e Keywords field. Separate each keyword with a  
com m a.  
Assigning Classifications  
To a ssign cla ssifica t ion s:  
1. Select a picture by clickin g it.  
2. Click th e Properties button in th e bottom righ t corn er of th e screen or  
righ t-click th e picture an d ch oose Properties from th e m en u.  
3. Click th e Classification tab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-6  
Getting Started  
4. Click th e m ajor classification th at applies to th e picture.  
5. Expan d th e m ajor classification by clickin g th e plus sign (+) beside it.  
6. Ch oose th e sub-classification th at applies to th e picture.  
7. Click th e Add button to assign th e selected classification to th e picture.  
8. Repeat th is process for each desired classification .  
9. Click OK.  
Searching for Pictures  
You can search for pictures across album s, on th e Ligh t Table and in the  
Trash , usin g keywords, classification s, picture filen am es, an d oth er  
properties, in cludin g th e auth ors n am e, com m en ts, source, an d dates  
th at pictures were taken .  
A search can be perform ed usin g a free-form text en try or by search in g  
lists of existin g keywords an d classification s.  
Th e results of a search are displayed on th e Viewer pan e.  
Entering Search Terms  
To en t er sea r ch t er m s:  
1. Click th e Search button or th e Search Results icon on th e Browser pan e.  
2. En ter your search term (s) in th e Look For field an d press ENTER. You can  
en ter search term s foun d in th e followin g fields on th e picture's property  
sh eets: Picture title, auth or, date picture was taken , source, keywords,  
com m en ts, an d classification s.  
3. All pictures th at m atch your search term are displayed on th e Viewer  
pan e.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
12-7  
Performing Keyword Searches  
To sea r ch for p ict u r es u sin g t h e list of ex ist in g k eyw or d s:  
1. Switch to th e Tree Browser by clickin g th e Tree Browser button .  
2. Open th e Keywords listin g by clickin g th e plus sign (+) beside Keywords.  
All th e keywords th at h ave been assign ed to pictures are listed in  
alph abetical order.  
3. High ligh t a keyword. All th e pictures th at h ave been assign ed th at  
keyword are displayed on th e Viewer pan e.  
Performing Classification List Searches  
To sea r ch for p ict u r es u sin g t h e Cla ssifica t ion s List :  
1. Switch to th e Tree Browser by clickin g th e Tree Browser button .  
2. Open th e Classification s listin g by clickin g th e plus sign (+) beside  
Classification s. Th e first level of classification s is displayed.  
3. To open a level, click th e plus sign beside it. All sublevels are th en  
displayed, in cludin g all n ew classification s th at you defin ed wh en  
assign in g classification s to pictures.  
4. As you h igh ligh t each classification , th e m atch in g pictures displayed on  
th e Viewer pan e will vary, depen din g on wh eth er th e Sh ow All ch eckbox  
is m arked.  
Changing Pictures  
Option s on th e Ch an ge tab en able you to alter th e appearan ce of a  
picture.  
Save As—En ables you to save im ages usin g differen t file form ats. You can  
replace th e origin al im age with th e n ew form at or save th e im age as a  
n ew file.  
Resize Im age—Specify a n ew h eigh t an d width for th e selected picture. If  
th e ch eckbox beside Keep Aspect Ratio of Im ages is m arked, you n eed to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-8  
Getting Started  
specify on ly on e of th e dim en sion s; th e program autom atically ch an ges  
th e oth er.  
Crop Im age—To crop a picture, press th e left m ouse button an d outlin e  
th e cropped area. To resize th e im age so th at it fills th e en tire area before  
croppin g, click th e Scale Im age button .  
Rotate Im age—To rotate an im age, click th e appropriate button (90  
Degrees Clockwise or Coun ter-clockwise) or en ter th e degrees in th e field  
provided. To reset th e im age to its origin al rotation , click th e Reset  
button .  
Ch an ge Ligh tin g—To brigh ten or darken a picture, use th e Brigh tn ess  
slide bar. Use th e Con trast slidebar to adjust th e con trast. More con trast  
widen s th e ran ge of lum in an ce in th e picture. Less con trast n arrows th e  
ran ge of lum in an ce.  
View th e effects on th e preview screen . Click th e Autom atic Adjustm en t  
button to reset th e brigh tn ess an d con trast to th e default values.  
Ch an ge Focus—To accen tuate edges an d con trasts in a picture, in crease  
th e focus by slidin g th e bar toward Sh arpen . To sm ooth edges an d  
m in im ize con trasts, slide th e bar toward Blur. View th e effects on th e  
preview screen .  
Add Mosaic—Th e m osaic effect groups pixels usin g tiles. Specify th e tile  
size by slidin g th e bar toward Sm aller or Larger. View th e effects on th e  
preview screen .  
Add Em bossin g—Raises th e backgroun d of a picture by suppressin g  
color an d outlin in g th e edges in black. Specify th e degree of em bossin g  
by slidin g th e Depth bar toward In or Out. View th e effects on th e  
preview screen . To specify th e direction al gradien t of th e em bossed edges,  
use th e m ouse to spin th e n eedle on th e Direction m eter.  
Correctin g Color an d ExposureWh en you click th e Auto Correct  
Color button , th e color correction is applied autom atically, usin g pre-  
defin ed settin gs. To fin e-tun e th e colors afterwards, you can in crease or  
decrease th e level of each color. Ch an ge th e red, green , or blue values by  
slidin g th e poin ter beside on e of th e colors to th e righ t or to th e left. Th e  
results are displayed in th e sam ple picture sh own on th e righ t side of th e  
dialog.  
To autom atically correct th e exposure, click th e Auto Correct Exposure  
button . Th e results are displayed in th e sam ple picture sh own on th e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
12-9  
righ t side of th e dialog. To can cel th e color an d/or exposure correction s  
an d restore th e origin al settin gs, click th e Reset button .  
To scale a picture to fill th e wh ite drawin g space, click th e Scale Picture  
button . Note th at th is does n ot apply to th e Save As or Resize com m an d.  
Sending Pictures to Other Imaging Programs  
Pictures from Ph oto Organ izer can be open ed in oth er im age editin g  
program s. Th e first tim e you click th e Sen d tab, on ly th e Setup icon is  
displayed. Click th e Setup icon to h ave th e program autom atically search  
your h ard drive for im agin g program s. Afterwards, th e icon s for th ese  
program s will be displayed on th e Sen d tab.  
Use a n y of t h e follow in g m et h od s t o sen d p ict u r es t o a n ot h er  
p r ogr a m :  
Drag th e picture to a program icon on th e Sen d tab.  
Select on e or m ore pictures an d th en click th e program icon on th e  
Sen d tab.  
Select on e or m ore pictures an d th en righ t-click a picture an d ch oose  
Sen d To on th e Im age m en u.  
Printing Pictures  
Pictures can be prin ted in dividually, on e per page, or as com bin ed  
th um bn ails on an in dex prin t. Pictures can be prin ted from th e Ligh t  
Table, album s, Search Results or Trash.  
To p r in t p ict u r es in d ivid u a lly, on e p er p a ge:  
1. Select on e or m ore pictures.  
2. Ch oose File, Prin t Ph otograph from th e m ain m en u. You can also righ t-  
click an y selected im age an d ch oose Prin t from th e m en u.  
To p r od u ce a n in d ex p r in t :  
1. Select m ultiple pictures.  
2. Click th e In dex Prin t icon on th e Create tab or ch oose File, In dex Prin t  
from th e m ain m en u.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 13:  
P a p er Ma st er Live  
Qu ick-St a r t Tu t or ia l  
Th is tutorial is design ed to get you up an d run n in g quickly with  
PaperMaster Live. Youll learn th e basics an d fin d out th at PaperMaster  
Live is fun an d easy to use! On ce youve com pleted th is tutorial, youll be  
fam iliar with :  
Search in g for a docum en t  
Viewin g an d custom izin g docum en ts  
Faxin g, e-m ailin g an d prin tin g your docum en ts  
Creatin g a n ew cabin et  
Copyin g/Movin g item s in to your n ew cabin et  
Creatin g custom ized drawers an d folders  
Filin g a docum en t in to PaperMaster Live  
Publish in g, sh arin g an d arch ivin g a cabin et to CD  
Closin g cabin ets an d exitin g PaperMaster Live  
Viewin g a cabin et stored on CD  
Rem em ber, th is tutorial on ly goes over th e basics. Read carefully th rough  
th e on -lin e h elp to discover even m ore ways PaperMaster Live can h elp  
you get organ ized an d save tim e.  
13-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-2  
Searching for a Document  
Searching for a Document  
On e of th e m ain features th at m akes PaperMaster Live such an effective  
organ izin g tool is its AutoSearch capability. With AutoSearch , you can  
locate docum en ts in your cabin et quickly an d easily with out h avin g to  
rem em ber wh ere th ey were filed. Search by drawer, folder or docum en t  
title, an n otation s, or docum en t con ten t, an d AutoSearch will presen t  
m atch es ordered by ran k an d based on th e frequen cy of th e keywords  
youve selected. Wh en you “Read & In dex” a docum en t, PaperMaster  
Live reads th e text in a docum en t, an d creates an in dex (m uch like th e  
in dex in th e back of th is m an ual). Wh en youre search in g for a particular  
docum en t, PaperMaster Live looks th rough th is in dex for keyword  
m atch es in th e text. To learn m ore about readin g a docum en t, see Help.  
1. Laun ch PaperMaster Live.  
2. Ch oose Au t oSea r ch ... in th e cabin et win dows Tools m en u. Th is brin gs  
up th e AutoSearch dialog box.  
3. Type th e words “Reg” an d “card” in th e “W or d s t o Look For ” field.  
AutoSearch is n ot case-sen sitive, so you can type an y com bin ation of  
lower an d upper case letters.  
4. Click on “En t ir e Ca b in et ” in th e Wh ere to Search box if its n ot already  
selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing and Customizing Your Documents  
13-3  
5. Click on “Docu m en t s” in th e Search For box if its n ot already selected.  
6. Click Sea r ch .” Match in g docum en ts are th en displayed by Ran k  
(frequen cy of keywords). Th e n um ber of docum en t foun d (un der “Item s  
Foun d”), an d th e n um ber of docum en ts search ed (un der “Item s  
Search ed”) are also displayed.  
Viewing and Customizing Your Documents  
Th ere are several tools in PaperMaster Live th at you can use to custom ize  
your docum en ts. Well go over som e of th em in th is tutorial.  
Op en in g a n d View in g a Docu m en t  
Open in g a docum en t in PaperMaster Live is very easy. Here is a quick  
dem on stration of h ow to open th e registration card in th e Docum en t  
Viewer. From th ere, youll m ove on to croppin g th e docum en t, fillin g out  
th e registration card usin g Type Text an n otation s, faxin g it to  
DocuMagix, an d th en prin tin g a copy for your own use.  
1. Double click on th e docum en t you wish to open from th e Sea r ch  
win dow or select it an d click on th e “Op en Docu m en t ” button .  
If you know where the document is, you can skip the search. Double-click on the  
“Open Me First!” drawer. Double-click on the “DocuMagix Information” folder.  
Double-click on the document entitled “DocuMagix Registration Card.”  
Cr op p in g You r Docu m en t  
Th is is a very useful feature, especially wh en you h ave sm aller docum en ts  
you wan t to keep track of, such as busin ess cards or th e registration card.  
1. Ch oose Au t oCr op from th e Im a ge m en u. Th is autom atically rem oves  
an y excess wh ite space aroun d th e docum en t.  
PaperMaster Live also offers a manual crop tool should you wish to crop a  
specific portion of your document. This is particularly useful when for saving a  
single newspaper article without the need to cut the paper.  
Cr ea t in g An n ot a t ion s  
Th ere are differen t ways to an n otate a docum en t in PaperMaster Live.  
On e is th e “Sticky Note” m eth od, wh ich h ides th e an n otation un der a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-4  
Viewing and Customizing Your Documents  
sticky n ote icon , an d an oth er is th rough th e “Type Text” tool, wh ich  
allows you to type directly on to th e docum en t.  
“ St ick y Not e” An n ot a t ion  
Use th is type of an n otation to m ake n otes to yourself about th e  
docum en ts youve filed.  
1. Ch oose St ick y Not e from th e Tools m en u.  
2. Click an ywh ere on th e registration card to add a “St ick y Not e”  
an n otation . In th e title field of th e “Sticky Note” dialog box, type in th e  
action taken (i.e. faxed) an d todays date. In th e m essage section , type in  
details of th e action (i.e. th e fax n um ber an d address of wh ere th e  
registration card was sen t). You can ch an ge th e Sticky Note to th e color of  
your ch oice by selectin g th e Color button in th e dialog box. Click OK.  
If you adopt personal conventions in your sticky notes, such as “To Do:” and  
“Payment due:” you can later search on all outstanding items by specifying  
these keywords in your search.  
Typ e Text Tool  
1. Ch oose Typ e Text from th e Tools m en u.  
Th is brin gs up th e Type Text dialog box, wh ere you can ch oose th e  
properties of th e text, in cludin g fon t, poin t size, style (Bold, Italic, or  
Un derlin e), text color, an d backgroun d color.  
Use the background color (opaque or transparent) to help block out items behind  
the text or to allow them to overlap such as lines on a form.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing and Printing Your Documents  
13-5  
2. Position th e m ouse wh ere youd like to h ave text, click th e left m ouse  
button on ce, an d begin fillin g out th e DocuMagix registration card. To  
delete a text an n otation , just poin t an d click on th e box aroun d it, go  
in to th e Ed it m en u, an d ch oose Delet e An n ot a t ion . You can also click  
on th e righ t m ouse button to display a pop-up m en u with an n otation  
option s.  
To edit the annotation, click inside the box and make your text changes. To  
move it, click on the outside border of the box and drag it to its new location.  
You can also resize the text by dragging on any corner.  
Faxing and Printing Your Documents  
On ce your fax h ardware an d software are in stalled, faxin g from  
PaperMaster Live is easy. If you h ave a prin ter in stalled, you can prin t  
docum en ts just as easily. Here well dem on strate th ese fun ction s by  
h elpin g you fax th e registration card directly to DocuMagix, an d prin t  
out a h ard copy to m ail. See on lin e Help to learn h ow to set fax/m odem  
preferen ces.  
Both Fax and Print options can be invoked from the document viewer (as we  
will demonstrate) or from the folder window (no need to open the document  
first).  
Fa x in g  
1. Ch oose Fa x un der th e File m en u. Th is Fax dialog box lets you set th e  
ran ge, scalin g option s, quality, n um ber of copies, collation , an d wh eth er  
to fax an n otation s.  
The Print Annotations, Type Text box needs to be selected to fax your filled-in  
Registration Card.  
2. Click OKon th e fax dialog screen . (PaperMaster Live will n ow in voke  
your own in stalled fax software).  
3. Fill in th e fax in form ation , an d click “Sen d .” Th is step m ay vary  
accordin g to your fax software. Fax your registration card to DocuMagix  
at (800) 362-8621 or outside North Am erica at (408) 434-0915.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-6  
Creating a New Cabinet and Copying Information  
P r in t in g  
1. Choose P r in t under the File m enu. This Print dialog box lets you set the  
print range, scaling options, print quality, num ber of copies, collation, and  
whether to print annotations. If everything is correct, click OK.  
The Print Annotations, Type Text box needs to be selected to print your filled-in  
Registration Card.  
Creating a New Cabinet and Copying  
Information  
PaperMaster Live allows you to create an un lim ited n um ber of cabin ets,  
so you can back up in form ation easily. For exam ple, if youd like to h ave  
a cabin et for your office busin ess an d an oth er for your h om e busin ess.  
Cr ea t in g a New Ca b in et  
1. Ch oose Ca b in et >New Ca b in et ... un der th e Ca b in et W in d ow s File  
m en u.  
2. In th e New Ca b in et dialog box th at pops up, n am e th e cabin et  
Backup Cabinet ” an d select th e location of th e cabin et.  
If you have a CD-RW, you can select this drive as the location for your new  
cabinet. If you have a CD-R drive, you should select a different location for the  
new cabinet (see the “Publishing, sharing and archiving cabinets to CD”  
section for information on how to store this cabinet to CD after it has been  
created).  
You can share cabinets with multiple users over a network drive by setting the  
Read-Only cabinet attribute. See online Help for more information.  
Cop yin g/ Movin g it em s in t o You r New Ca b in et  
Th e steps for copyin g an d m ovin g an y item s in your cabin et are th e sam e  
wh eth er th e item be a drawer or a page. Th e im portan t th in g to  
rem em ber is th at th e h ierarch y m ust be m ain tain ed. Th erefore a drawer  
can on ly be m oved or copied in to a cabin et an d a page can on ly be  
m oved or copied in to a docum en t. Likewise, item s can be m oved an d  
copied between cabin ets as easily as with in th e sam e cabin et.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating Customized Drawers and Folders  
13-7  
1. Usin g th e righ t m ouse key, drag th e Open Me First! drawer from th e old  
cabin et in to an em pty slot in th e “Ba ck u p Ca b in et ” cabin et. Wh en th e  
Move/Copy m en u pops up, select Cop y.  
As a default, dragging and dropping containers between two cabinets using the  
left mouse button will perform a Copy command. Dragging and dropping  
containers between the same cabinet using the left mouse button will perform a  
Move command. The right mouse button will always give you the pop up menu  
and allow you to make a selection.  
Creating Customized Drawers and Folders  
With PaperMaster Live, you h ave cabin ets, drawers, an d folders, just like  
you do with a real file cabin et. Its easy to custom ize th em for your n eeds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-8  
Creating Customized Drawers and Folders  
Cr ea t in g a New Dr a w er  
1. Create a drawer by ch oosin g New Dr a w er from th e cabin et win dows  
File m en u. Th is brin gs up th e New Dr a w er dialog box.  
2. Replace th e default n am e “Drawer #1” in th e n am e field with  
“DocuMagix”.  
3. Ch oose th e color blue from th e pull-down Tex t Color m en u.  
4. Ch oose a drawer icon by selectin g th e Ch oose Icon button . From th e  
list of Stan dard icon s double-click on your ch oice.  
You will n ow see your n ew drawer in th e cabin et win dow. You can  
ch an ge th e drawers location by draggin g an d droppin g th e drawer to  
an oth er em pty location .  
Cr ea t in g a New Fold er  
Open th e “DocuMagix” drawer by double-clickin g on it.  
1. Create a folder by ch oosin g th e New Fold er com m an d from th e drawer  
windows File m en u. As with th e New Dr a w er com m an d, th is brin gs  
up a dialog box th at allows you to ch oose th e folders properties. Just as  
you did with th e n ew drawer, type in a folder n am e (for th e purposes of  
th is tutorial, type in “PaperMaster Live”), select a color from th e pull-  
down m en u, an d click OK.  
Youll n ow see th e n ew folder displayed in your “DocuMagix” drawer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filing a Document into PaperMaster Live  
13-9  
Filing a Document into PaperMaster Live  
Th ere are several ways of filin g docum en ts in to PaperMaster Live,  
in cludin g scan n in g, down loadin g from th e Web, im portin g, an d filin g  
from an y Win dows application (in cludin g fax software, word processors  
an d e-m ail). Well go over th e scan n in g m eth od in th is tutorial. For  
details on th e oth er ways of filin g in to PaperMaster Live, see th e  
Referen ce section of th is m an ual.  
PaperMaster Live allows you to put papers in to your filin g cabin et usin g  
an y TWAIN or ISIS com plian t scan n er.  
1. Ch oose an y paper (for exam ple, th e registration card) th at you would like  
to file in your DocuMagix filin g cabin et.  
2. Open th e folder wh ere youd like to file th e scan n ed docum en t.  
3. Scan in th e registration card by placin g it in your scan n er, an d ch oosin g  
New Docu m en t >Sca n from th e File m en u. Th is activates th e scan n er,  
an d brin gs th e scan n ed im age of th e registration card in to th e docum en t  
viewer.  
4. If th is is th e first tim e youre scan n in g a docum en t, th e Select Source  
dialog box for your scan n er will pop up. Select th e scan n er youre usin g  
from th e list, an d click “OK”.  
Steps for scanning may vary by scanner and driver used. Refer to your scanner  
documentation for detailed instructions.  
Startin g a scan from a folder win dow, files th e docum en t in to th at folder  
autom atically. Startin g a scan in th e cabin et win dow files th e docum en t  
in th e In box. Drag an d drop to file th e docum en t in an oth er drawer.  
5. Nam e th e docum en t by typin g “Registration Card” in to th e Nam e field  
of th e Docum en t Viewer. Th e n am e is displayed in th e title bar. If you  
don t ch oose a n am e, PaperMaster Live will assign a default n am e  
con sistin g of th e date an d tim e th e docum en t was filed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-10  
Publishing, Sharing and Archiving Cabinets to CD  
Publishing, Sharing and Archiving  
Cabinets to CD  
If you h ave a CD-R or CD-RW, you h ave th e tool n ecessary to take a large  
cabin et with all of your custom docum en ts just about an ywh ere. Because  
CDs are very ligh t an d com pact wh ile providin g a large m edium for  
storage, th ey are th e ideal m ech an ism for storin g an d sh arin g  
in form ation .  
1. Create your custom file cabin et an d fill it with th e docum en ts you wan t  
with an y n ecessary an n otation s.  
It is important to verify the information before placing it on a CD because once  
there, the information will be read-only and cannot be altered in any way. You  
will not be able to add or delete documents, rename any of the contents, crop or  
annotate any of the pages.  
2. Select th e Publish Cabin et icon from th e toolbar in th e cabin et win dow.  
3. A dialog will appear askin g you to select th e location of th e n ew cabin et  
as well as th e cabin et n am e.  
4. You will also be given th e option to in clude a cabin et viewer with th e  
publish ed CD. (Th is is particularly useful if you are goin g to be sh arin g  
th e in form ation with som eon e wh o m ay n ot own PaperMaster Live.)  
5. Click on th e P u b lish button .  
Closing a Cabinet  
1. Ch oose Close Ca b in et from th e cabin et win dows File m en u.  
Th is closes th e cabin et in cludin g all of its drawers, folders an d  
docum en ts. If th is is th e on ly open cabin et, th is operation will exit  
PaperMaster Live.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing a Cabinet Given to you on CD  
13-11  
Viewing a Cabinet Given to you on CD  
If you own PaperMaster Live, you can view a cabin et on a CD sim ply by  
selectin g Open Cabin et from your local cabin et an d open in g th e on e on  
th e CD. Th e cabin et on th e CD will fun ction sim ilar to th e cabin et on  
your local drive except it will be read-on ly.  
If you do n ot own a copy of PaperMaster Live, you can use th e special  
PaperMaster Live Viewer wh ich was publish ed on th e CD with th e  
cabin et. Th is viewer will allow you to open an y PaperMaster file cabin et  
(n ot just th e on e on th e CD) an d give you full PaperMaster Live  
fun ction ality with out an y of th e editin g tools. Th is is a great opportun ity  
for you to try PaperMaster Live an d see for yourself h ow powerful yet  
easy it is to use.  
Congratulations!  
Youve successfully com pleted th e PaperMaster Live tutorial, an d learn ed  
th e basics. Wasn t th at in credibly easy? You can n ow custom ize your own  
file cabin et, scan , e-m ail, fax an d prin t your docum en ts. You can also  
fin d th em after th eyve been filed.  
But rem em ber, PaperMaster Live h as even m ore great features, so ch eck  
th em out in th e on lin e Help.  
Upgrade Notification  
If you are curren tly usin g PaperMaster Live 3.1, you qualify for a free  
upgrade to PaperMaster Live 98.  
To ch eck th e version of your software, laun ch your file cabin et an d select  
H elp | Ab ou t ... from th e m en u bar in th e Cabin et win dow.  
Down load your free upgrade from h ttp://www.docum agix.com /updates/  
h pcdr. If you do n ot h ave access to th e in tern et, you can request to h ave  
a CD sen t to you for a n om in al sh ippin g an d h an dlin g fee. Please con tact  
DocuMagix Custom er Support at th e address or teleph on e n um ber in th e  
back of th is users guide for m ore in form ation .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-12  
Upgrade Notification  
PaperMaster Live 98 allows allows you to store com m on Win dows  
application files in th eir origin al form at directly in to your file cabin et.  
Th is lets you search for all of your docum en ts (scan n ed paper, web pages  
an d even application files) in on e easy to organ ize file cabin et. For m ore  
in form ation on th e n ew features in PaperMaster Live 98, ch eck th e  
DocuMagix Web page at h ttp://www.docum agix.com /custom er/  
upgrades.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ch apter 14:  
Nor t on An t iVir u s  
Th is ch apter explain s h ow to use Norton An tiVirus to protect your  
com puter from viruses. In gen eral, Norton An tiVirus operation is th e  
sam e for Win dows 95, Win dows NT 3.51, an d Win dows NT 4.0.  
Wh erever th ere are differen ces, th ey are specifically n oted.  
About Norton AntiVirus  
Norton An tiVirus is th e m ost soph isticated an d powerful product  
available to defen d your com puter from virus in fection . Its autom atic  
protection features con tin ually an d vigilan tly safeguard your com puter  
wh ile you work. If a virus is ever foun d, Norton An tiVirus guides you  
th rough th e process of elim in atin g it.  
Th e Norton An tiVirus preset option s balan ce efficien cy with m axim um  
protection ; you do n ot n eed to ch an ge an yth in g. In stall Norton  
An tiVirus an d you are im m ediately protected from com puter viruses.  
What is a virus?  
A com puter virus is, sim ply, a com puter program written by an ill-  
in ten tion ed program m er. Your com puter can catch a virus from disks, a  
local n etwork or th e In tern et. Just as a cold virus attach es itself to a  
h um an h ost, a com puter virus attach es itself to a program … an d just like  
a cold, its con tagious!  
Viruses take con trol of your com puter with out your kn owledge. Often ,  
th ey rem ain in active un til a predeterm in ed trigger date (for exam ple,  
Friday th e 13th ) to wreak h avoc. Th ey can cause your com puter to  
beh ave stran gely, for exam ple, beep or display an n oyin g m essages, as  
14-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-2  
About Norton AntiVirus  
well as dam age data, delete files, an d even com pletely erase your h ard  
disk. Macro viruses, th e n ewest th reat, in fect an d spread th rough out  
Word an d Excel docum en ts.  
Wh en ever an in fected program is run or an in fected docum en t is open ed,  
th e attach ed virus is activated an d spreads to oth er program s an d  
docum en ts. Viruses don t, h owever, in fect or dam age h ardware, such as  
keyboards or m on itors. You m ay experien ce stran ge beh aviors (such as  
ch aracters appearin g upside down ) but your disks are n ot ph ysically  
dam aged, just wh ats stored on th em .  
What Norton AntiVirus does automatically  
Norton An tiVirus safeguards your com puter from virus in fection , n o  
m atter wh at th e source. You are protected from viruses th at spread from  
h ard drives an d floppy disks, th ose th at travel across n etworks, an d even  
th ose th at are down loaded from th e In tern et. In sh ort, Norton An tiVirus  
does th e followin g:  
Elim in ates viruses an d repairs virus-dam aged files.  
Makes sure your com puter is safe from viruses at startup.  
Ch ecks for viruses every tim e you use software program s on your  
com puter, floppy disks, an d docum en t files th at you receive or create.  
(For exam ple, th e n ewest kin d of viruses are spread via Microsoft  
Word an d Excel m acros.)  
Mon itors your com puter for an y un usual sym ptom s th at m ay  
in dicate an active virus.  
Run s a sch eduled scan autom atically on ce per week to con firm th at  
your h ard disks are virus-free.  
Protects your com puter from In tern et-born e viruses as part of regular  
operation . No separate program s or Norton An tiVirus option s  
ch an ges are n ecessary. Program an d docum en t files are scan n ed  
autom atically as th ey are down loaded an d files with in com pressed  
files are scan n ed wh en th ey are extracted.  
What you have to do  
On ce a m on th , obtain from Sym an tec updated in form ation th at Norton  
An tiVirus n eeds to keep your virus protection up-to-date. You can do this  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Norton AntiVirus  
14-3  
on lin e (for exam ple, over th e In tern et) or by m ail. See “Keepin g virus  
protection curren t” on page 14-14.  
WHY? New viruses are bein g written all th e tim e. You h ave to regularly  
obtain files from Norton An tiVirus th at con tain th e latest virus  
protection . If you don t, you are n ot protected again st viruses th at h ave  
been released in to th e com puter world sin ce you bough t th e product.  
Win dows 95: Create Norton An tiVirus Rescue Disks to h elp recover from  
a virus em ergen cy.  
WHY? Rescue disks are an im portan t part of your virus protection for  
Win dows 95. For exam ple, th ey allow you to safely restart your com puter  
if it is h alted due to a virus in m em o. See “Win dows 95: Create rescue  
disks” on page 14-7.  
System requirements for installation  
Win dows 95  
486 IBM or com patible PC with 8 MB of m em ory  
Microsoft Win dows 95  
10 MB of free h ard disk space  
Win dows NT  
Adm in istrator-level privileges  
16 MB of m em ory (32 MB or m ore recom m en ded)  
Microsoft Win dows NT version s 3.51 or 4.0  
16 MB of free h ard disk space  
Using Norton AntiVirus  
Every tim e you start your com puter, Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect lets  
you kn ow it is workin g. Th e Auto-Protect icon in th e lower-righ t corn er  
of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop rem in ds you th at you are fully  
protected again st virus in fection .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-4  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
Turning Auto-Protect off temporarily  
WHY? You are som etim es told to disable your an tivirus software wh en  
you are in stallin g n ew com puter program s. In th is case, you disable Auto-  
Protect tem porarily an d th en turn it back on again .  
To t u r n off Nor t on An t iVir u s Au t o-P r ot ect t em p or a r ily:  
1. Double-click th e Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect icon in th e lower-  
righ t corn er of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop.  
Win dows NT 3.51: Double-click th e Auto-Protect icon on th e  
desktop.  
2. Click Disable.  
To turn on Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect:  
1. Double-click th e Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect icon in th e lower-  
righ t corn er of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop.  
2. Click En able.  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
Start Norton AntiVirus  
WHY? From th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow you can in itiate scan s,  
ch an ge h ow Norton An tiVirus works, or click LiveUpdate to get th e latest  
virus protection files directly from Sym an tec.  
To op en t h e Nor t on An t iVir u s w in d ow :  
On th e Win dows taskbar, click Start, poin t to Program s, poin t to HP  
CD-Writer Plus, poin t to th e Norton An tiVirus group, th en click  
Norton An tiVirus.  
Win dows NT 3.51: Double-click th e Norton An tiVirus icon in th e  
Norton An tiVirus group.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
14-5  
Register Norton AntiVirus  
WHY? After registration , you are eligible for 90 days of free tech n ical  
support, special upgrade pricin g, an d up-to-date product an d com pan y  
in form ation .  
To r egist er Nor t on An t iVir u s:  
1. In th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow, ch oose About Norton  
An tiVirus from th e Help m en u.  
2. Click Register Now an d follow th e on -screen in struction s.  
Choose Contents  
from the Help  
menu for all  
Click to view  
descriptions of  
known viruses  
Click to update  
your virus  
protection online  
Select drives to  
scan for viruses  
Click to get a  
description of  
everything you can  
do from this window  
Get help  
WHY? Th e Norton An tiVirus h elp system h as step-by-step procedures to  
h elp you keep your com puter safe from viruses.  
To get h elp u sin g Nor t on An t iVir u s, d o on e of t h e follow in g:  
Ch oose Con ten ts from th e Help m en u.  
Click th e Help button on an y Norton An tiVirus screen .  
Righ t-click an y option in a Norton An tiVirus screen an d ch oose  
Wh ats Th is for a brief defin ition of th e option . (Righ t-click h elp is  
n ot available in Win dows NT 3.51.)  
Youll be able to register directly over th e In tern et, by a dial-up m odem  
con n ection , or prin t a form to m ail to Sym an tec.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-6  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
Scan for viruses  
WHY? We recom m en d you scan all floppy disks before you use th em .  
To sca n d r ives for vir u ses:  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. In th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow, ch eck specific drives in th e  
Drives list box or select m ultiple drives by ch eckin g item s in th e  
Drive types box.  
3. Click Scan Now.  
To sca n in d ivid u a l files or fold er s for vir u ses:  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. From th e Scan m en u at th e top of th e Norton An tiVirus m ain  
win dow, ch oose Folder or File.  
3. Make your ch oice an d click Scan .  
TIP: To quickly scan a drive, folder, or file, right-click an item in a My  
Computer or Windows Explorer window and choose Scan with Norton  
AntiVirus.  
Schedule virus scans  
WHY? A weekly sch eduled scan is an addition al reassuran ce th at your  
com puter is virus-free. Wh en you in stalled Norton An tiVirus, a scan is  
already sch eduled to run on ce per week autom atically.  
To sch ed u le a sca n :  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. In th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow, click Sch eduler.  
3. Click Add.  
4. Select Scan For Viruses for th e Type Of Even t.  
5. Select Weekly for th e Frequen cy.  
6. Type /L in th e Wh at To Scan text box.  
Th is tells Norton An tiVirus to scan all local drives. You could also  
en ter specific drive letters, for exam ple, C: D: in stead.  
7. Click OK to close th e dialog box, th en click OK again to con firm .  
8. Click Exit in th e upper-righ t corn er of th e Norton Sch eduler dialog  
box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
14-7  
9. Win dows 95: Click Min im ize to close th e dialog box but leave th e  
Norton Sch eduler run n in g. Un der Win dows NT, th e Sch eduler service  
run s all th e tim e.  
Your com puter m ust be turn ed on wh en th e scan is due to take place.  
Customize Norton AntiVirus  
WHY? Norton An tiVirus is preset to provide you with com plete  
protection again st viruses. It is un likely you n eed to ch an ge an y settin gs.  
However, Norton An tiVirus provides option s for users (for exam ple,  
system adm in istrators) wh o wan t to custom ize th e way virus protection  
works.  
To cu st om ize Nor t on An t iVir u s p r ot ect ion :  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. Click th e Option s button in th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow.  
3. Click on e of th e tabs in th e Option s dialog (for exam ple, Auto-  
Protect). Th e dialog ch an ges to sh ow option s for th e selected feature.  
4. Click Help to get in form ation about option s.  
5. Make your ch an ges an d click OK to exit.  
TIP: Right-click an option and choose Whats This for an explanation of the  
option.  
Windows 95: Create rescue disks  
WHY? Rescue Disks are an im portan t part of your virus protection for  
Win dows 95. For exam ple, th ey allow you to safely restart your com puter  
if it is h alted due to a virus in m em ory. Because Win dows NT operates  
differen tly th an Win dows 95, Rescue Disks are n ot n eeded for Win dows  
NT. To update virus protection , see “Keepin g virus protection curren t” on  
page 14-14.  
You n eed th ree 1.4 MB floppy disks th at are eith er n ew or do n ot con tain  
an y data th at you wan t to keep an d th ree disk labels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-8  
What else can I do with Norton AntiVirus?  
To cr ea t e or u p d a t e r escu e d isk s:  
1. On th e Win dows taskbar, click Start, poin t to Program s, poin t to HP  
CD-Writer Plus, poin t to th e Norton An tiVirus group, th en click  
Rescue Disk.  
2. Follow th e on -screen in struction s.  
3. After th e rescue disks are created, store th em in a safe place.  
TIP: Create new rescue disks whenever you install new hardware, add or change  
an operating system, repartition your hard disk, or update your virus protection.  
Using outdated Rescue Disks could cause serious problems.  
Windows NT: Bypass boot record scans  
WHY? Norton An tiVirus is preset to scan your disks boot records for  
viruses as part of its regular operation . As a security precaution , som e NT  
system s are con figured to preven t users from accessin g th ese disk areas.  
You m ust h ave adm in istrator-level righ ts to scan boot records. If you see  
a dialog box sayin g th at you can n ot access th e boot records, you can set a  
con figuration option to bypass boot record scan s.  
Click to skip only the  
boot records and  
continue the scan  
To bypass boot record scans for Windows NT:  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. Click Option s in th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow.  
3. Click th e Scan n er tab.  
4. In th e Wh at to Scan group box, un ch eck Master Boot Record an d  
Boot Records.  
5. Click OK to save your settin gs an d close th e dialog box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What to do if a virus is found  
14-9  
What to do if a virus is found  
Win dows 95: If you see a virus alert  
1. Look for words th at iden tify th e type of problem .  
Read th e wh ole m essage.  
2. Press En ter to ch oose th e action th at is preselected  
for you, or type th e first letter of th e action you wan t to  
take (for exam ple, type R for Repair). If you n eed m ore  
in form ation , see “Quick guide to alert action s” on th e  
n ext page.  
If your com puter is h alted because of an active virus in  
m em ory, turn off th e power, in sert your Norton  
An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk in th e A: drive, an d  
turn th e power back on . Follow th e on -screen  
in struction s. (See “Win dows 95: Create rescue disks” on  
page 14-7.)  
Win dows NT: If you see a virus alert  
1. As part of Auto-Protect operation , Norton An tiVirus  
for Win dows NT is preset to Den y Access to an in fected  
file durin g regular com puter operation . See“Custom ize  
Norton An tiVirus” on page 14-7 to ch an ge h ow Auto-  
Protect works.  
2. Start Norton An tiVirus an d scan your disk to  
elim in ate th e virus. See “Scan for viruses” on page 14-6.  
Win dows 95 an d Win dows NT:  
If you see th e Norton An tiVirus Repair Wizard  
Click Next to h ave Norton An tiVirus autom atically get  
rid of th e virus.  
Win dows 95 an d Win dows NT:  
If you see th e Problem s Foun d dialog  
1. High ligh t an en try in th e list box.  
2. Read th e m essage at th e bottom of th e dialog box.  
3. Click Repair wh en in fected files are foun d.  
See “Quick guide to alert action s” on th e n ext page for  
in form ation about th e oth er action s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-10  
What to do if a virus is found  
NOTE: If a virus is detected during Windows 95 startup, a text  
message will be displayed. Just follow the on-screen instructions.Quick guide to  
alert actions  
If a Norton AntiVirus alert or Problems Found dialog box appears on your screen, use this  
table to decide what to do.  
Actions  
For a VIRUS FOUND, Repair is always th e best ch oice. Repair elim in ates th e virus  
an d repairs th e in fected item autom atically.  
Type R or click Repair.  
[Repair]  
[Delete]  
Erases both th e virus an d th e in fected file. Th e virus an d file are gon e forever.  
Ch oose Delete if Repair is n ot successful. Replace a deleted file from th e origin al  
program disks or backup copy. If th e virus is detected again , your backup copy or  
origin al disk is in fected.  
Type D or click Delete.  
Stops th e curren t operation to preven t you from usin g an in fected file. Stop does  
[Stop]  
n ot solve th e problem . Youll be alerted again th e n ext tim e you do th e sam e  
th in g.  
Type S or click Stop.  
Con tin ues th e curren t operation . On ly ch oose Con tin ue if you are sure a virus is  
n ot at work. Youll be alerted again . If youre n ot sure wh at to do, its safer to  
ch oose Stop.  
[Con tin ue]  
Type C or click Con tin ue.  
If you ch oose Exclude an d a virus is at work, th e virus won t be caugh t. Exclude  
sh ould be used on ly by system adm in istrators for system tun in g.  
Type E or click Exclude.  
[Exclude]  
Win dows 95 On ly (In oculation is n ot part of Win dows NT protection )  
For an UNINOCULATED ITEM, In oculate stores in form ation about an item in a  
special file th at is later used to en sure your system stays virus-free. Type C or  
click In oculate.  
[In oculate]  
For an INOCULATION CHANGE, In oculate updates th e stored in oculation data  
for a boot record or file th at h as ch an ged sin ce it was last in oculated.  
In oculation ch an ges fall in to two categories:  
Expected: If youve just updated a program , th e boot records an d system files  
m ay ch an ge. In th is case, type C or click In oculate.  
Un expected: Ch an ges to boot records an d system files are usually caused by  
viruses. If you h ave n ot recen tly upgraded a program , Type R or click Repair.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What to do if Norton AntiVirus cant repair  
14-11  
What to do if Norton AntiVirus cant repair  
WHY? On e of th e m ost com m on reason s Norton An tiVirus can t repair a  
file is th at you don t h ave th e m ost up-to-date virus protection files. Click  
LiveUpdate in th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow to obtain th e latest  
files via m odem or In tern et.  
If an item cant be repaired  
Update your virus protection an d scan again . See “Keepin g virus  
protection curren t” on page 14-14 for details.  
Read th e in form ation on your screen carefully to iden tify th e type of  
item th at can t be repaired, th en m atch it to on e of th e types below.  
In fected files are th ose with file n am es th at in clude .COM or .EXE.  
Docum en t files such as .DOC, .DOT, an d .XLS can also be in fected.  
Com pressed files m ay con tain m an y files. You can often tell a  
com pressed file by its n am e. Man y com pressed files en d in .ZIP.  
Hard disk m aster boot record, boot record, or system files (such as  
IO.SYS or MSDOS.SYS) an d floppy disk boot record an d system files  
are replaced usin g th e Rescue Disks or, som etim es, your operatin g  
system (Win dows or DOS) disks.  
Infected files  
If in fected files can t be repaired, you n eed to delete th em from your  
com puter. If you leave an in fected file on your com puter, th e virus  
in fection can still spread. On ce deleted, th e in fected file an d th e virus are  
gon e forever.  
If Norton An tiVirus can t repair a file:  
1. Ch oose Delete wh en prom pted.  
2. Replace th e deleted docum en t file with a backup copy or rein stall a  
deleted program from th e origin al program disks. Be sure to scan th e  
backup disks before you use th em .  
If th e virus is detected again after you replace or rein stall th e file, your  
backup copy or origin al program disks are probably in fected. You can try  
con tactin g th e m an ufacturer for a replacem en t.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-12  
What to do if Norton AntiVirus cant repair  
Compressed files  
A com pressed file m ay con tain m an y in dividual files. For exam ple,  
MYFILE.ZIP m ay con tain th e files: FILE1.DOC, FILE2.DOC, FILE3.TXT,  
FILE.EXE, an d so on . Norton An tiVirus can detect viruses in th e  
in dividual files with in th e com pressed file; h owever it can n ot repair or  
delete th ese files un til you un com press (open up) th e com pressed file.  
To u n com p r ess a n d r ep a ir :  
1. Double-click th e Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect icon in th e lower-  
righ t corn er of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop, th en click  
Disable to turn Auto-Protect off tem porarily.  
2. Create a a tem porary folder (for exam ple, C:\ TEMP).  
3. Move th e in fected, com pressed file to th e tem porary folder.  
4. Use a program such as Norton Navigator, Win Zip, or PKUNZIP to  
un com press th e file in th e tem porary folder.  
5. On th e Win dows taskbar, click Start, poin t to Program s, poin t to HP  
CD-Writer Plus, poin t to th e Norton An tiVirus group, th en click  
Norton An tiVirus.  
6. From th e Scan m en u at th e top of th e Norton An tiVirus m ain  
win dow, ch oose Folders.  
7. Select th e C:\ TEMP folder, th en click Scan to scan th e files again .  
8. Let th e Repair Wizard autom atically repair all th e in fected files.  
9. Click Exit to close Norton An tiVirus.  
10. Delete th e in fected, com pressed file.  
11. Double-click th e Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect icon in th e lower-  
righ t corn er of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop, th en click  
En able to turn Auto-Protect on again .  
After th e virus is elim in ated, recom press th e files if desired.  
Hard disk master boot record or boot record  
Win dows 95: If Norton An tiVirus can t repair your h ard disk or m aster  
boot record, you can use your up-to-date Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy  
Boot Disk to restore it. (See “Win dows 95: Create rescue disks” on page  
14-7.) If your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk isn t up to date,  
con tact Sym an tec Tech n ical Support. See th e Service an d Support  
Solution s at th e en d of th is m an ual.  
WARNING: If the critical information stored on the Boot Disk disk is outdated,  
it could cause problems when you attempt to restore your computer. It is  
unlikely you would be able to fix these problems on your own. However, if you  
have a current Boot Disk, the following procedure is safe to attempt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What to do if Norton AntiVirus cant repair  
14-13  
To restore your h ard disk:  
1. Switch off your com puter usin g th e power switch .  
2. Place your write-protected Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk in  
th e A: drive, th en switch on your com puter.  
3. At th e DOS prom pt (A:\ >), type RESCUE /RESTORE an d press En ter.  
Th e Restore Rescue In form ation dialog box appears.  
4. Make sure Drive A: is specified for th e location of th e rescue data.  
5. Ch eck all th e item s in th e Item s To Restore group box.  
Press Tab to m ove aroun d th e dialog box. Press spacebar to ch eck or  
un ch eck item s.  
6. Ch oose Restore to restore th e selected item s.  
7. Wh en th e process is com plete, rem ove your Norton An tiVirus  
Em ergen cy Boot Disk from Drive A: an d restart your com puter.  
Win dows NT: If Norton An tiVirus could n ot successfully repair th e  
m aster boot record or a boot record on your h ard disk, restart your  
com puter from th e Win dows NT Em ergen cy Repair Disk th at you created  
wh en you in stalled Win dows to attem pt a repair. If th is fails, you will  
h ave to rein stall Win dows NT.  
Floppy disk boot record  
If Norton An tiVirus can n ot repair a floppy disk boot record, it still  
rem oves th e virus. Th e in form ation on th e floppy disk rem ain s accessible  
an d you can safely copy th e files on to an oth er disk. However, th e floppy  
disk is n o lon ger bootable.  
System file  
Win dows 95: If Norton An tiVirus can n ot repair a system file (for  
exam ple, IO.SYS or MSDOS.SYS) you can n ot delete it. You m ust rein stall  
Win dows.  
Restart your com puter from an un in fected, write-protected floppy disk  
an d rein stall Win dows. You can use your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy  
Boot Disk (see “Win dows 95: Create rescue disks” on page 14-7) or th e  
Win dows 95 Startup Disk th at you created wh en you in stalled Win dows  
to start up. You could also use a boot disk from an y version of DOS from  
version 5.0 or later.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-14  
Keeping virus protection current  
Keeping virus protection current  
WHY? Norton An tiVirus relies on up-to-date in form ation to detect an d  
elim in ate viruses. On e of th e m ost com m on reason s you m ay h ave a  
virus problem is th at you h ave n ot updated your protection files sin ce  
you purch ased th e product.  
Sym an tec provides on lin e access to th ese n ew files, called virus  
defin ition s files, at n o ch arge every m on th . You n eed to update your  
virus defin ition s files m on th ly.  
From Win dows, use a m odem or In tern et con n ection to let  
LiveUpdate autom atically down load an d in stall updated files.  
Get updates by m ail. Th is service requires a fee. For m ore  
in form ation , see Sym an tec Service an d Support Solution s at th e en d  
of th is m an ual.  
Updating virus protection with LiveUpdate  
WHY? LiveUpdate is th e easiest way to keep virus protection curren t  
because it autom atically down loads th e proper files an d in stalls th em on  
your com puter. You can get virus protection updates an ytim e by clickin g  
th e LiveUpdate button .  
To u p d a t e vir u s p r ot ect ion :  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. In th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow, click LiveUpdate.  
3. In th e How Do You Wan t To Con n ect drop-down list box, select on e  
of th e followin g:  
Fin d Device  
Autom atically  
Norton An tiVirus determ in es if you h ave an  
In tern et con n ection or m ust con n ect usin g your  
m odem .  
In tern et  
Modem  
Norton An tiVirus con n ects to a special Sym an tec  
site on th e In tern et.  
Norton An tiVirus dials a preset n um ber an d  
con n ects to a Sym an tec server th rough your  
m odem .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keeping virus protection current  
14-15  
TIP: We recommend Find Device Automatically. However, you may want to  
control the choice depending on long-distance telephone charges for the direct  
modem connection or access time from the Internet site.  
4. Click Next to start th e autom atic update.  
Using LiveUpdate Email  
WHY? Wh en ever a m ajor virus th reat is discovered th at requires an  
update to your virus protection , Sym an tec can n otify you by em ail so  
you can run LiveUpdate im m ediately. Th e em ail in cludes an attach m en t  
th at can start a LiveUpdate session for you.  
To r eceive LiveUp d a t e Em a il:  
1. Poin t your In tern et browser to  
www.sym an tec.com /avcen ter/n ewsletter.h tm l  
2. Fill out th e registration form .  
3. Click th e Subscribe Me button . Sym an tec will n otify you by em ail  
wh en ever protection updates are available.  
To st a r t a LiveUp d a t e session fr om t h e LiveUp d a t e Em a il:  
Wh en you receive a LiveUpdate Em ail, laun ch or run th e em ail  
attach m en t called LIVEUPDT.NLU from your m ail program .  
You m ust laun ch or run th e attach m en t; sim ply readin g or viewin g it will  
n ot work. Wh en th e attach m en t run s, it autom atically starts a  
LiveUpdate session on your com puter. You don t h ave to do an yth in g  
else.  
Scheduling automatic LiveUpdates  
WHY? Sch edulin g a LiveUpdate to run autom atically is th e best way to  
en sure th at you don t forget to update virus protection every m on th .  
To sch ed u le a u t om a t ic LiveUp d a t es:  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. In th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow, click Sch eduler.  
3. Click Add.  
4. Select Sch eduled LiveUpdate for th e Type Of Even t.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-16  
Keeping virus protection current  
5. Select Mon th ly for th e Frequen cy.  
6. Click OK to close th e dialog box, th en click OK again to con firm .  
7. Click Exit in th e upper-righ t corn er of th e Norton Sch eduler dialog  
box.  
8. Win dows 95: Click Min im ize to close th e dialog box but leave th e  
Norton Sch eduler run n in g. Un der Win dows NT, th e Sch eduler service  
run s all th e tim e.  
Your com puter m ust be turn ed on wh en th e LiveUpdate is due to take  
place.  
Updating virus protection without LiveUpdate  
WHY? Sym an tec supplies a special program called In telligen t Updater if  
you can n ot use LiveUpdate. If you don t h ave a m odem or In tern et  
con n ection , you can get th e updates by m ail. You m ay also ch oose to  
down load th e updates from an on lin e service or bulletin board. Th e  
In telligen t Updater program is available from several sources — ph on e  
n um bers are in cluded in th e Sym an tec Service an d Support Solution s at  
th e en d of th is m an ual.  
To in st a ll t h e la t est vir u s d efin it ion s on you r com p u t er :  
1. Down load th e In telligen t Updater program to an y folder on your  
com puter or In sert th e disk you received from Sym an tec in th e A:  
drive.  
2. From a My Com puter or Win dows Explorer win dow, locate an d th en  
double-click th e In telligen t Updater program .  
Th e filen am e for In telligen t Updater h as th e form mmNAyyI.EXE,  
wh ere mm is th e m on th an d yy is th e year.  
3. Follow all prom pts displayed by th e update program . Th e In telligen t  
Updater program search es your com puter for Norton An tiVirus, th en  
in stalls th e n ew virus defin ition s files in th e proper folder  
autom atically.  
If prom pted to overwrite, click Yes. Th e files are bein g replaced with  
n ew on es.  
4. Restart your com puter.  
5. Scan your disks to m ake sure n ewly discovered viruses are detected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
14-17  
Troubleshooting  
Norton AntiVirus cant repair my infected files.  
Th e m ain reason th at Norton An tiVirus m ay n ot be able to repair your  
in fected files is:  
You don t h ave th e latest virus defin ition s files in stalled on your  
com puter. You sh ould update th ese files m on th ly to protect your  
com puter from th e latest viruses. To update virus defin ition s, see  
page 14.  
Norton AntiVirus Auto-Protect doesnt load when  
I start my computer.  
If th e Norton An tiVirus Auto-Protect icon does n ot appear in th e lower-  
righ t corn er of th e taskbar on your Win dows desktop, Auto-Protect is n ot  
loaded. Make sure th at Norton An tiVirus is n ot con figured to start Auto-  
Protect autom atically.  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. Click th e Option s button in th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow.  
3. Click th e Auto-Protect tab.  
4. Ch eck th e Load Auto-Protect At Startup ch eck box.  
5. Click OK to save your settin gs an d close th e Option s dialog box.  
I’ve scanned and removed a virus, but it keeps  
infecting my files.  
Th e virus m ay be in a program file with an un usual exten sion th at  
Norton An tiVirus isn t set to look for. Do th is:  
1. Start Norton An tiVirus.  
2. Click th e Option s button in th e Norton An tiVirus m ain win dow.  
3. Click th e Scan n er tab.  
4. Select th e All Files option in th e Wh at To Scan group.  
5. Click OK to save your settin gs an d close th e Option s dialog box.  
6. Scan all disks th at you use an d repair all in fected files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-18  
Troubleshooting  
Th e source of th e in fection is a floppy disk.  
Scan all th e floppy disks you use for viruses.  
Some Norton AntiVirus features are password  
protected, and I dont know the password.  
Un in stall Norton An tiVirus, th en rein stall it.  
A program does not work properly after repair.  
Alth ough Norton An tiVirus rem oves th e virus, th e file m ay be dam aged  
beyon d repair.  
Delete th e program an d replace it with a backup copy or rein stall it  
from th e origin al program disks. If th e virus is detected again , th e  
backup copy or origin al program disks are probably in fected.  
Windows 95: My Norton AntiVirus Emergency  
Boot Disk doesnt work  
Due to th e n um ber of product specific tech n ologies used by  
m an ufacturers to con figure an d in itialize h ard disks, Norton An tiVirus  
can n ot always create a bootable Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk  
autom atically. If your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk does n ot  
work properly, do on e of th e followin g:  
If you h ave a special boot disk for your com puter, add it to your  
Norton An tiVirus rescue disk set. In a virus em ergen cy, boot from th at  
disk (first slide open th e plastic tab on th e back of th e disk to m ake  
sure it is write-protected). Rem ove th e disk an d in sert your rescue disk  
labelled “Norton An tiVirus Program Disk.” At th e DOS prom pt, type  
A:GO an d press En ter, th en follow th e on -screen in struction s.  
Use th e Disk Man ager or sim ilarly n am ed program th at cam e with  
your com puter to m ake your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk  
bootable. Be sure to test your m odified Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy  
Boot Disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
14-19  
Som etim es, your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk does n ot work  
properly because you h ave m ore th an on e operatin g system in stalled,  
such as Win dows NT an d Win dows 95. To m odify th e disk, do th e  
followin g:  
Start up from your h ard disk, in sert your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy  
Boot Disk in th e A: drive, an d, from a DOS prom pt, type SYS A: an d  
press En ter. Th is tran sfers th e operatin g system to th e rescue disk. Be  
sure to retest your Norton An tiVirus Em ergen cy Boot Disk.  
Command-line switches  
Th e Norton An tiVirus scan n er can be run with com m an d-lin e switch es to  
override con figuration settin gs. Wh en scan n in g usin g com m an d-lin e  
switch es, Norton An tiVirus run s m in im ized, but will pop open on your  
screen if a virus is foun d.  
Som e switch es are used alon e, wh ile oth ers are followed by a param eter,  
eith er a plus (+) or m in us (-) sign . You can use m ore th an on e switch an d  
m ore th an on e param eter on a com m an d lin e. Th e vertical bar sym bol (|)  
m ean s th at you sh ould use eith er param eter, but n ot both . Do n ot type  
th e brackets aroun d th e param eters on th e com m an d lin e.  
Win dows 95: NAVW32 [[pathname] options]  
Win dows NT: NAVWNT [[pathname] options]  
An y drive, folder, file, or com bin ation of th ese is  
scan n ed. If you wan t to scan a com bin ation of item s,  
use a space to separate th e item s. You can use  
wildcards wh en specifyin g path n am es for a group of  
files. For exam ple,  
pathname  
NAVW32 A: C:\ MYDIR\ *.EXE)  
NAVWNT A: C:\ MYDIR\ *.EXE  
All drives, except drives A: an d B:, are scan n ed.  
Network drives are scan n ed if th e Allow Network  
Scan n in g option is selected in th e Scan n er Advan ced  
Settin gs dialog box  
/A  
/L  
All local drives, except drives A: an d B:, are scan n ed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-20  
Troubleshooting  
En ables (+) or disables (-) scan n in g of subfolders for  
an y folders specified in th e path n am e. S+ is th e  
default.  
/S[+|-]  
/M[+|-]  
Win dows 95 on ly: En ables (+) or disables (-) scan n in g  
of m em ory (for exam ple, NAVW32 C: /M+ or  
NAVW32 D: /M-)  
Win dows 95 on ly: On ly m em ory is scan n ed.  
/MEM  
En ables (+) or disables (-) scan n in g of boot records  
(for exam ple, NAVW32 A: /B+ or NAVWNT B: /B-).  
/B[+|-]  
On ly th e boot records of th e specified drives are  
scan n ed  
/BOOT  
No scan results are reported on screen .  
/NORESULTS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appen dix A:  
Tech n ica l Sp ecifica t ion s  
Minimum System Requirements  
Your com puter sh ould m eet or exceed th ese requirem en ts:  
IBM or com patible Pen tium /75 Mh z processor or above  
®
®
®
Microsoft Win dows 95 or Win dows NT 4.0  
NOTE: For Windows NT, Service Pack 3 is required.  
16 MB RAM  
Hard drive with at least 528 MB storage capacity (th at is, with a  
tran sfer rate of at least 800 kB/sec an d disk access tim e of less th an 20  
m sec)  
110 MB free h ard drive space for in stallin g software  
10 MB free h ard drive space for each m in ute of m usic to be recorded  
High -speed parallel port (EPP or ECP) set to:  
- IRQ 7 an d I/O address 378 or  
- IRQ 5 an d I/O address 278  
In Windows 95, to ch eck th e con figuration settin gs of your parallel  
port:  
- Righ t-click on th e My Com puter icon  
- Select Prop erties  
- Select th e Device Man ager tab  
- High ligh t Prin ter Port  
- Click on th e Prop erties button  
- Select th e Resou rces tab  
- Look at th e n um bers listed for In put/Output Ran ge (I/O)  
an d In terrupt Request (IRQ)  
If th e n um bers n eed to be ch an ged, see th e docum en tation th at cam e  
with your com puter.  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
What Affects System Performance  
What Affects System Performance  
How well your com puter fun ction s with th e CD-Writer Plus drive,  
particularly h ow fast it writes data to a CD, depen ds on a n um ber of  
factors. Som e of th ese factors are listed below.  
Processor (CPU). Th e type an d speed of your processor greatly affects  
th e speed at wh ich your com puter tran sfers data to an d from th e CD-  
Writer Plus drive. If th e processor speed is too slow, you m ay h ave to  
write at 1x speed.  
RAM. Your com puter m ust h ave en ough m em ory available to h an dle  
its operatin g system , th e CD-Writer Plus drives application s, an d th e  
data you are tran sferrin g to an d from CDs. Th e system sh ould n ot  
h ave to swap data to an d from th e h ard drive.  
Your Hard Drive. Th e speed at wh ich your h ard drive accesses an d  
tran sfers data (its access time an d transfer rate) affects perform an ce.  
Newer h ard drives, th ose with a storage capacity greater th an 528 MB,  
are fast en ough to h an dle th e CD-Writer Plus drives 2x write speed.  
Parallel Port Type. Th e type of parallel port on your com puter h as a  
m ajor in fluen ce in determ in in g th e speed at wh ich your CD-Writer  
Plus drive run s. Possible parallel port types are:  
Stan dard parallel port (SPP) wh ich is som etim es called bi-  
direction al or com patible  
En h an ced parallel port (EPP)  
Exten ded capabilities port (ECP)  
Most PCs sh ipped sin ce Jan uary 1995 con tain support for th e  
required h igh -speed EPP an d ECP m odes. System s sh ipped before th is  
date m ay on ly support SPP.  
SPP m ode allows th e CD-Writer Plus drive to run at up to a 2x read  
speed an d up to a 1x write speed if th e oth er m in im um system  
requirem en ts are m et.  
EPP an d ECP m odes allow th e CD-Writer Plus drive to run at up to a  
6x read speed an d a 2x write speed if th e oth er m in im um system  
requirem en ts are m et.  
TIP: Check your computer’s specifications to see which kind of parallel port was  
installed. Sometimes a fast ECP/EPP port will be set up as a slow standard  
mode port at the factory (for example, some HP Vectra models). Check your  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Specifications  
A-3  
computer’s manual to find out how to reset it to the faster speed. If that doesn’t  
work you can also install a faster parallel port.  
I/ O an d IRQ. Th e IRQ (in terrupt request level) an d I/O (in put/  
output) base address are th e com puter resources used by th e parallel  
port. Th e CD-Writer Plus drive requires a parallel port set to:  
IRQ 7 with I/O base address 378, or  
IRQ 5 with I/O base address 278  
Most com puters autom atically assign th ese. But, depen din g on your  
con figuration , you m ay run in to con flicts with oth er devices. For  
exam ple, an oth er device (such as your soun d card) m ay be assign ed  
th e sam e settin gs. If th ere is a con flict, it m ust be corrected before  
in stallin g th e drive.  
To fin d out wh ich device is in con flict:  
In Windows 95, righ t-click on th e My Com p u ter icon , select  
Prop erties, select th e Device Man ager tab, double-click on th e  
com puter icon to see a list of wh ich device is usin g each resource  
settin g on your com puter.  
For op tim u m p erform an ce, run SCANDISK.EXE an d DEFRAG.EXE  
on your h ard drive before usin g your CD-Writer Plus drive for th e first  
tim e (see your Win dows m an ual for m ore in form ation ). Th en run  
th em periodically after th at. Th ese program s im prove access tim es to  
th e h ard drive, wh ich will h elp im prove system perform an ce wh ile  
writin g to an d readin g from th e CD-Writer Plus drive.  
NOTE: Refer to your computer manual or contact your computer vendor if you  
have any questions about your computer’s configuration or capabilities.  
Drive Specifications  
Discs su p p o r t ed  
120 m m an d 80 m m CD-R (write-on ce) m edia  
(an y CD-ROM drive can read th is m edia)  
120 m m CD-RW (ReWritable) m edia  
(for use on ly in CD-ReWritable an d MultiRead CD-ROM drives)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-4  
Drive Specifications  
ISO 9660 Disc Da t a Ca p a cit y (74 Min u t e CD)  
Nu m ber  
of  
Size requ ired for h ead er  
in form ation  
Size available for d ata/  
p er session  
session s  
1
5
approxim ately 23 MB*  
627 MB on e session  
114 MB each session  
approxim ately 79 MB  
(approx. 23 for th e first,  
14 MB each of th e rest)  
10  
30  
approxim ately 149 MB  
(approx. 23 for th e first,  
14 MB each of th e rest)  
50 MB each session  
7.4 MB each session  
approxim ately 430 MB  
(approx. 23 for th e first,  
14 MB each of th e rest)  
6
*1 MB is defin ed as 10 bytes  
UDF 1.5 Disc Da t a Ca p a cit y (74 Min u t e CD)  
493 MB for CD-RW  
618 MB for CD-R  
Dim en sio n s  
Heigh t: 2.6" (66 m m )  
Width : 7.1" (180 m m )  
Depth : 11.2" (284 m m )  
Weigh t (n et): 2,157 gram s (~4.7 lbs)  
P er f o r m a n ce  
Buffer size: 750 kB  
Average access tim e (1/3 stroke): <325 m s  
Data tran sfer rate (recordin g):  
150 KB/s sustain ed (1x speed)  
300 KB/s sustain ed (2x speed)  
Data tran sfer rate (readin g):  
150 KB/s (1x speed)  
300 KB/s (2x speed)  
up to 900 KB/s (6x speed)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appen dix B:  
Cu st om er Su p p or t  
Who do you need to call for help?  
Th e followin g table will h elp direct you to th e appropriate custom er  
support service.  
Software or Hardware  
HP CD-Writer Plus  
Direct CD  
Custom er Support Service  
HP Custom er Support  
Page  
page B-2  
page B-2  
page B-8  
page B-8  
page B-8  
page B-5  
page B-9  
page B-11  
page B-13  
Adaptec Custom er Support  
Adaptec Custom er Support  
Adaptec Custom er Support  
Adaptec Custom er Support  
HP Custom er Support  
Easy-CD Audio  
Jewel Case Design er  
CD Copier  
HP Sim ple Trax  
Adobe Ph oto Deluxe  
Adobe Custom er Support  
Corel Prin t House Magic Corel Custom er Support  
Ph oto Organ izer  
Paper Master Live  
Norton An tivirus  
Digital NOW! Custom er  
Support  
Docum agix Custom er  
Support  
page B-14  
page B-17  
Sym an tec Custom er Support  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2  
Before You Call HP  
Before You Call HP  
If your own troublesh ootin g efforts fail, con tact Custom er Support. Make  
sure you are at your system an d h ave your drive in stalled wh en you call.  
Ph on e n um bers begin on page B-5. Before you con tact th em , h ave th e  
in form ation below ready. For h elp fin din g th is in form ation , see page B-3.  
If you receive an error m essage, write it down before you call.  
In form ation  
For your com puter  
CD-Writer Plus drive m odel  
Drive firm ware version  
Drive serial n um ber  
Com puter bran d an d m odel  
Operatin g system an d version ?  
Win dows 95 or Win dows NT 4.0  
Version Num ber:  
(for NT) Service Pack Num ber:  
Am oun t of RAM in stalled  
Oth er CD-ROM drives? yes/no  
(If yes, list th em )  
Soun d card? yes/no  
Type:  
IDE con troller settin gs  
Prim ary / Secon dary / Oth er  
IRQ _______  
I/O base address _______  
Master in use?_______  
Slave in use?_______  
Oth er IDE devices in your  
com puter system ?  
yes/no (If yes, list th em )  
IDE adapter board bran d/m odel, if  
an y  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Call HP  
B-3  
Where to Find This Information  
CD-W r it er P lu s d r ive m od el  
Th e CD-Writer Plus drive m odel n um ber appears on a sm all sticker on  
th e un dern eath side of th e tray of th e CD-Writer Plus drive, as well as  
on th e box. Example: 7200i (internal) or 7200e (external)  
Dr ive fir m w a r e ver sion  
In Windows 95, th e drive firm ware version an d m odel n um ber (above)  
appear in th e CD-ROM settin gs. Righ t-click on th e My Com puter icon ,  
select Properties, select th e Device Man ager tab, double-click on  
CDROM. Double-click on th e CD-Writer Plus drive, an d th en click on th e  
Settin gs tab. Example: Firmware revision 1.00  
In Windows NT, th e drive firm ware version an d m odel n um ber (above)  
appears in th e CD-ROM settin gs. Open th e Con trol Pan el. Click on SCSI.  
Scroll down th e list, double-click on ATAPI. Double-click on th e CD-  
Writer Plus drive, an d th en click on th e Settin gs tab. Example: Firmware  
revision 1.00  
Dr ive ser ia l n u m b er  
Th e CD-Writer Plus drive serial n um ber appears on th e m ain label on th e  
top of th e drive. See page 1-5. It also appears on th e un derside of th e CD  
tray.  
Com p u t er b r a n d a n d m od el  
Th e com puter bran d appears on th e fron t of your com puter an d in th e  
docum en tation th at cam e with your com puter. Example: Dell Dimension  
XP-90.  
Op er a t in g syst em a n d a m ou n t of RAM in st a lled  
In Windows 95, from th e Start m en u on th e task bar, select Settin gs/  
Con trol Pan el. Double-click on System . Select th e Gen eral tab. Write  
down th e version n um ber an d th e am oun t of m em ory in stalled; for  
example: 4.00.950 and 16 MB RAM.  
In Windows NT (wh ile sign ed on as Adm in istrator), from th e Start m en u  
on th e task bar, select Program s/ Adm in istrative Tools (Com m on )/  
Win dows NT Diagn ostics. Select th e Version tab an d write down th e  
version n um ber an d service pack n um ber; for example: 4.00.1381 and  
Service Pack 2. Th en select th e Mem ory tab an d write down th e am oun t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4  
Before You Call HP  
of m em ory listed un der Ph ysical Mem ory - Total; for example: 16 MB  
RAM.  
Ot h er CD-ROM d r ives  
Your com puter m ay h ave com e with an in tern al CD-ROM or you m ay  
h ave purch ased a CD-ROM drive. Ch eck th e docum en tation th at cam e  
with your com puter or CD-ROM drive. Example: Mitsumi 4x CD-ROM  
Sou n d b oa r d  
Your com puter m ay h ave com e with a soun d board an d speakers or you  
m ay h ave purch ased th em separately. Ch eck th e docum en tation th at  
cam e with your com puter or soun d board. Example: 16-bit audio card  
IDE con t r oller set t in gs  
1. In sert th e CD labeled “Software Disc 1” in to your CD-ROM drive.  
2. Click th e Start button on th e task bar, select Run ,  
type D:\ ASSIST /S (wh ere D: is your CD-ROMs drive letter)  
an d click on OK.  
3. Prin t th e results. You will h ave a list of tech n ical in form ation about  
each IDE con troller in your system an d each device attach ed.  
Ot h er IDE d evices  
An y devices attach ed to IDE con trollers in your com puter system , such as  
a CD-ROM drive, h ard drive, tape drive, an d so on . Example: HP Colorado  
5GB  
IDE a d a p t er b oa r d b r a n d / m od el  
If you are usin g a paddle board to add an oth er IDE con troller to your  
com puter system , ch eck th e m an ual th at cam e with your IDE board.  
Example: GSI 2C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP Customer Support  
B-5  
HP Customer Support  
If you h ave question s about th e HP Sim ple Trax software, call th e appropriate n um ber  
listed in th is section . If you n eed h elp with your CD-Writer Plus drive, your local  
reseller h as th e latest in form ation regardin g HP products an d services an d can provide  
support un der HP's com preh en sive m en u of reseller services. If your reseller is n ot able  
to h elp, you can obtain support from HP directly eith er th rough free 24-h ours/day  
in teractive electron ic services or by teleph on e (free durin g warran ty).  
Am er ica On lin e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyword: h pstor  
Com p u Ser ve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Go HPSYS  
W or ld W id e W eb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . www.h p.com /isgsupport/cdplus  
Bu llet in b oa r d sit e (8,N,1,F, 1200-28.8K b a u d )  
Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +31 (0)495 546909  
Asia/Pacific  
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (03) 9890 0276  
Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitel: (02) 762-0228  
Access: Go HPK  
Ch ollian : (02) 220-2001  
New Zealan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (09) 356 6642  
Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02)9233233  
First Nam e: HP  
Last Nam e: BBS  
H P Fir st Fa x b a ck Ser vice  
Sim ply dial th e fax n um ber from a touch -ton e ph on e or Group 3 fax m ach in e an d  
follow th e voice prom pts to select th e in dex of available support an d product  
in form ation docum en ts.  
USA an d Can ada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-368-9673 or 970-635-1510  
Europe  
Austria (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0660 8128  
Belgium (free lin e)  
- Dutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0800 11906  
- Fren ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0800 17043  
Den m ark (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 10453  
Fin lan d (free lin e). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9800 13134  
Fran ce (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05 905900  
Germ an y (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0130 810 061  
Italy (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678 59020  
Neth erlan ds (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06 022 2420  
Norway (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 11319  
Spain (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 993123  
Sweden (free lin e). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 795743  
Switzerlan d (free lin e)  
- Fren ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 1526  
- Germ an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 1527  
Un ited Kin gdom (free lin e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0800 960271  
Oth er location s in Europe (toll lin e) . . . . . . . . . .+31 (0)20 681 5792  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6  
HP Customer Support  
Asia/Pacific  
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (03) 9272 2627  
Ch in a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8610) -65055280  
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3) 3335-8622  
Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02) 769-0543  
New Zealan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (09) 356 6642  
Sin gapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 291-7951  
Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02)7195589  
E-m a il . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SureStore_Support@h p.com  
FTP Sit e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ftp.h p.com  
Login : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .an on ym ous  
Passw ord: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Your em ail address)  
Directory: . . . . /pub/in form ation _storage/surestore/cd-writer_plus  
Telep h on e  
USA an d Can ad a (M-F, 6am -6pm Moun tain tim e)  
Literature an d dealer referral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970-635-1500  
Can ada (for Fren ch -speakin g custom ers)  
pour assistan ce en fran çais. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-387-3867  
Durin g warran ty period  
- Tech n ical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970-635-1500  
After warranty period (charges begin only when you connect to a Support Technician,  
prices are subject to change without notice)  
Tech n ical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-810-0130  
(Per in ciden t fee of $25 US dollars ch arged to  
Visa, MasterCard or Am erican Express)  
U.S. on ly Tech n ical Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900-555-1800  
($2.50 per m in ute/m axim um of $25. You m ust be 18 years  
of age or h ave paren tal perm ission to call 900 n um bers.)  
Europe (M-F, 8:30-18:00 Cen tral European Tim e)  
Use these Technical Support numbers during and after your warranty period. No charge  
for Technical Support during warranty period. Per incident charge after warranty period.  
Austria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06 60 63 86  
Belgium  
- Dutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 626 88 06  
- Fren ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 626 88 07  
Den m ark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 29 40 99  
Fin lan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 03 47 288  
Fran ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04 50 43 98 53  
Germ an y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0180 52 58 143  
Irelan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 662 55 25  
Italy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02 2 641 0350  
Neth erlan ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 606 87 51  
Norway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 11 62 99  
Portugal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01 44 17 199  
Spain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 23 21 123  
Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08 61 92 170  
Switzerlan d (Fren ch , Italian , an d Germ an ) . . . . . . . . 08 48 80 11 11  
Un ited Kin gdom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0171 512 52 02  
En glish lan guage support from oth er coun tries . +44 171 512 52 02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HP Customer Support  
B-7  
Asia/ Pacific  
Australia (M-F 7am -7pm , Eastern Stan dard Tim e). . . (03) 9272 8000  
Ch in a (M-F 8:30-17:30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8610)-62625666  
exten sion s 5602 th rough 5609, 5611 an d 5612  
(8610)-62614174  
(8610)-62624175  
(8610)-62614176  
Korea (M-F, 8:30-19:00) . . (02) 3270-0700 / 080-999-0700 (toll free)  
New Zealan d (M-F, 9am to 9pm Aucklan d Tim e) . . . . (09) 356 6640  
Sin gapore (M-F, 9:00-17:00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 271-7233  
Taiwan (M-F, 8:30-17:30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02) 717-9609  
FAX  
USA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970-667-0997  
Asia/Pacific  
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (03) 9272 4099  
Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02) 3270-0707  
New Zealan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(+61 3) 9272 4099  
Sin gapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 278-9225  
Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02)5140276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-8  
Adaptec Customer Support  
Adaptec Customer Support  
Electronic Support  
Tech n ical in form ation , in cludin g product literature, an swers to com m on ly asked  
question s, in form ation on software upgrades an d oth er topics is available electron ically  
th rough th e followin g:  
W or ld W id e W eb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . www.adaptec.com  
On th e In tern et, you can sen d CD-ROM, CD-R, an d CD publish in g-specific m essages to  
[email protected]. In clude “CD-R SW” in th e subject.  
Th e Adaptec Software Products Group can also be foun d on several CD-ROM, CD-R,  
an d CD publish in g n ewsgroups an d lists on th e In tern et.  
In t er a ct ive Fa x Syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303-684-3400  
In t er a ct ive Voice Resp on se Syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-800-959-7274  
Technical and Product Support  
To speak with an Adaptec product support represen tative, call:  
In t h e U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-408-934-7283  
In Eu r op e  
32-2-352-3490  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Technical Support  
B-9  
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Technical Support  
U.S. a n d Ca n a d a  
Adobe's Custom erFirst program offers th e followin g Tech n ical Support  
option s:  
A tech n ical support database on th e World Wide Web providing  
Ph otoDeluxe tech n ical n otes:  
h ttp://www.adobe.com /supportservice/custsupport/  
Adobe FaxYI, a free fax-on -dem an d system th at can fax an y of m ore  
th an 1,000 tech n ical an d custom er service docum en ts on  
Ph otoDeluxe. In North Am erica, call 206-628-5737 from a touch -ton e  
ph on e an d follow th e recorded in struction s. Th e in dex of  
Ph otoDeluxe issues, th e docum en t is 360099.  
Tech n ical docum en ts from Adobe by e-m ail. All docum en ts available  
th rough Adobe FaxYI are also available th rough e-m ail. To receive an  
in dex of docum en ts for Ph otoDeluxe issues, sen d e-m ail to  
tech docs@adobe.com an d type 360099 in th e subject lin e.  
Th e Adobe Forum for Am erica On lin e© or Com puServe®.  
Correspon d with Ph otoDeluxe experts to get an swers to com m on ly  
asked question s. On Am erica On lin e, type th e keyword Adobe an d  
en ter th e Adobe Ph otoDeluxe m essage board. On Com puServe, type  
GO ADOBEAPP an d en ter th e Ph otoDeluxe Forum . Forum s an d  
availability m ay vary by coun try.  
Th e In tern et button in Ph otoDeluxe. Click on th e button to access  
Ph otoDeluxe tips, tech n iques, an d oth er resources over th e Web.  
Addition ally, you can ch oose from a variety of support option s in North  
Am erica an d Can ada th rough th e Adobe Custom erFirst® program ,  
in cludin g sin gle-in ciden t call support, 900 n um ber access, an d even  
yearly support con tracts. For in form ation on th e Adobe Custom erFirst  
program , call 800-685-3652 between 6 A.M. an d 5 P.M., Pacific Stan dard  
Tim e, Mon day th rough Friday.  
Outside North Am erica or Can ada, term s m ay vary. Con tact your local  
subsidiary or distributor for details. For th e ph on e n um ber of your local  
subsidiary, visit our Web site at th is address:  
h ttp://www.adobe.com /supportservice/in tlsupport.h tm l  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-10  
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Technical Support  
CUSTOMER SERVICE  
Disk replacem en ts or User's Man uals can on ly be provided from th e  
m an ufacturer th at in cluded th e Ph otoDeluxe program with your n ew  
h ardware device.  
European Support  
Em ail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tech docs@adobe.com  
Fax(Call BackByFax Service to docum en ts) . . . . . . +44 131 458 3022  
In tern et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .h ttp://www.adobe.com  
BBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +44 131 458 4666  
Modem settin gs: Up to 14,400 baud; Data Bits: 8 Stop Bits; 1 Parity: Non e.  
Leave th e usern am e an d password blan k on first call.  
Teleph on e (UK on ly, £1.50 per m in ute) . . . . . . . . . . . 0897 161 345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corel Print House Magic Service & Support  
B-11  
Corel Print House Magic Service & Support  
Corel is com m itted to providin g custom ers with h igh -quality, tim ely tech n ical  
support. Th is section describes th e ran ge of support services available.  
Note: Th e term s of Corel's tech n ical support offerin gs are subject to ch an ge  
with out n otice.  
Technical Support Services  
Classic tech n ical support services  
Tech n ical support is available for 30 days from th e day you place your first call to  
tech n ical support at 613-728-6891 (North Am erica On ly). Th ere will be n o  
support fees ch arged for th is in itial 30 day period oth er th an applicable lon g  
distan ce teleph on e toll ch arges. Corel represen tatives are available to respon d to  
calls from Mon day to Friday, 8:30 a.m . to 7:30 p.m ., Eastern Stan dard Tim e.  
Durin g an d after your classic support period, you can also use oth er basic services.  
Description s of oth er services are available from Corels h om e page on th e World  
Wide Web at HTTP:/ / WWW.COREL.COM. For details on th e support option s  
available after your classic support service expires, please con tact Corel Tech n ical  
Support at (613) 728-6891 (Please n ote: Lon g distan ce toll ch arges will apply).  
Worldwide Technical Support  
Corel custom ers residin g outside North Am erica can con tact Corel Tech n ical  
Support represen tatives in Dublin , Irelan d, or a local Auth orized Support Partn er.  
Tech n ical support outside North Am erica is available to you at th e followin g  
location s. If your coun try is n ot listed below, please ch eck th e Services an d  
Support section on our World Wide Web site at: WWW.COREL.COM. You m ay  
also dial (353)-1-7082500 for in form ation on reach in g Tech n ical Support.  
Priority Technical Support services  
To request an up-to-date listin g of Corel's Auth orized Support Partn ers worldwide,  
an d a copy of Corel's Priority Tech n ical Support Policy, con tact Corel Tech n ical  
Support at (353)-1-7082500.  
Access numbers for Corel Print House Magic Technical  
Support  
La t in Am er ica  
Argen tin a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0541) 954-6500  
Brazil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 011 5505 4725  
Ch ile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 671-3060  
Colum bia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1-2150411  
Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-800-024-2673  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-12  
Corel Print House Magic Service & Support  
Mid d le Ea st  
Dubai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971.4.523.526  
Isreal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-6793-723  
Ea st er n Eu r op e  
Czech Republic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420-2-312-3871  
Polan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0048)-(71)-728-141 ext. 289  
Eu r op e  
Austria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (01)-589-241-30  
Belgium -Fren ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02) 714-41-30  
Belgium -Dutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (02) 714-41-31  
Den m ark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-25-80-30  
Fin lan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (90)-229-060-30  
Fran ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1)-40-92-76-20  
Germ an y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01805-2582-11  
Hun gary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +36-1-3275737  
Irelan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(01)-7082600  
Italy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .02-452-812-30  
Neth erlan ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020-581-4426  
Norway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-97-19-30  
Polan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0048)-(71)-728-141 ext. 289  
Portugal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+353-1-708-2333  
Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (095) 361-2000  
Spain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-661-3627  
Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0680-711-751  
Switzerlan d-Fren ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0848-80-85-90  
Switzerlan d-Germ an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0848-80-85-90  
Un ited Kin gdom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0171 - 298 85 16  
Asia P a cific  
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-9898-6860  
Hon g Kon g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8100-3729  
In dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11 3351948  
In don esia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .001-800-65-7266  
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-5645-8379  
Malaysia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-800-800-1090  
New Zealan d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09 526 1155  
Sin gapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-800-773-1400  
South Korea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82-2-639-8778  
Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (886) 2-593-3693  
Afr ica  
South Africa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 021-658-4222  
Please n ote: Th e term s of Corel's tech n ical support offerin gs are subject to ch an ge  
with out n otice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Photo Organizer Customer Support  
B-13  
Photo Organizer Customer Support  
Call th e appropriate n um ber listed in th is section if you h ave question s  
about th e Ph oto Organ izer software.  
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 419 0000  
Can ada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 (905) 475 2777 , ext264  
Latin Am erica & Asia pacific  
Teleph on e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 635 6639  
On lin e. . . . . . . . www.broder.com /support/support.h tm l  
Europe (except Hollan d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 001 329 365 9980  
Hollan d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 011 358 9 348 40 311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-14  
PaperMaster Technical Support  
PaperMaster Technical Support  
United States and Canada  
DocuMagix, In c.  
2880 Zan ker Road  
Suite 204  
San Jose, CA 95134  
USA  
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-408-434-1001  
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-800-362-8624  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-408-434-0915  
Un it ed Kin gd om  
Esselte MSD  
PaperMaster  
Norm an Park  
Bar Hill  
Cam bridge CB3 8SS  
UNITED KINGDOM  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +44 (0) 1954 78 90 37  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+44 (0) 1954 78 27 57  
Au st r a lia  
In digo Pacific Pty Ltd.  
PaperMaster  
Level 16, 275 Alfred Street  
North Sydn ey NSW 2060  
AUSTRALIA  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +61-2-9955 8000  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +61-2-9955 8511  
Au st r ia / Sw it zer la n d  
Karl Ben e & Co  
PaperMaster  
In dustriestrasse 346  
A-2822 Erlach a.d. Pitten  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +43(0)2627 400 000  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +43(0)2627 400 138  
Belgiu m  
Esselte N.V.  
PaperMaster  
In dustriepark-Noord 30  
PO Box 85  
B-9100 St Niklaas  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +32(0)3 760 3311  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +32(0)3 766 0612  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PaperMaster Technical Support  
B-15  
Den m a r k  
Esselte A/S  
PaperMaster  
Nordre Fasan vej 117-119  
DK-2000 Frederiksberg  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +45 38 16 7800  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +45 38 16 7935  
Ea st er n Eu r op e/ Mid d le Ea st / Afr ica / Gr eece/ Cyp r u s/ Tu r k ey  
Esselte UK Ltd. (Export Div)  
PaperMaster  
Kin gsn orth In dustrial Est  
Wotton Road  
Ash ford, Ken t TN23 6FL  
En glan d  
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+44(0) 1233 62 44 21)  
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +44(0) 1233 61 30 00  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +44(0) 1233 64 69 03  
Fin la n d  
Esselte OY  
PaperMaster  
Kutom otie 2  
Fin -00380 Helsin ki  
Teleph on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+358(0) 9 565 3355  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+358(0) 9 565 0261  
Fr a n ce/ Sw it zer la n d  
Esselte SA  
PaperMaster  
192, rue Ch am pion n et  
F-75018 Paris, FRANCE  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +33(0)14 485 1700  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +33(0)14 229 8944  
Ger m a n y  
Esselte Deutsch lan d Gm bH  
PaperMaster  
An derter Str. 99 d  
D-60559 Han n over  
GERMANY  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+49(0)511 95 95 000  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+49(0)511 95 95 302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-16  
PaperMaster Technical Support  
It a ly/ Sw it zer la n d  
Esselte SpA  
PaperMaster  
Cen tro Direzion ale Lom bardo  
Via Rom a 108  
I-20060 Cassin a de Pecch i  
Milan , ITALY  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +39 2 95 300 991  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +39 2 95 300 300  
Net h er la n d s  
Esselte B.V.  
PaperMaster  
Apm ereweg 17  
NL-3440 AE Woerden  
Tel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +31(0)348 41 50 84  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +31(0)348 42 12 03  
Nor w a y  
Esselte AS  
PaperMaster  
Postboks 62 Okern  
N-0508 Oslo  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +47 22 88 55 00  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +47 22 65 07 00  
P ola n d  
Esselte Polska Sp. Z.o.o.  
PaperMaster  
ul Okrezn a 95  
Pl-02-933 Warsaw  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +48(0)22 651 6021  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +48(0)22 651 6021  
Sp a in / P or t u ga l  
Esselte  
PaperMaster  
Tom as Redon do s/n  
Edificio Luarca  
E-28033 Madrid, SPAIN  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+39(9) 3 415 0333  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+34(9) 1 381 5120  
Sw ed en  
Esselte Sverige AB  
PaperMaster  
Sun dybergsvagen  
Box 1377  
S171 27 Soln a  
Teleph on e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +46(0) 8 705 15 00  
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +46(0) 8 705 15 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symantec Service and Support Solutions  
B-17  
Symantec Service and Support Solutions  
Sym an tec is com m itted to excellen t service worldwide. Our goal is to  
provide you with profession al assistan ce in th e use of our software an d  
services, wh erever you are located.  
Tech n ical Support an d Custom er Service solution s vary by coun try. If you  
h ave question s about th e services described below, please refer to th e  
section “Worldwide Service an d Support” at th e en d of th is section .  
Virus definitions update disk  
If you don t h ave a m odem to obtain virus defin ition s files usin g th e  
In tern et, Com puserve, Am erica On lin e, or th e Sym an tec BBS, you can  
order regular updates from Sym an tec to arrive by m ail. Th is service  
requires a fee.  
To order, do on e of th e followin g:  
In th e Un ited States, call (800) 441-7234.  
Outside th e Un ited States, con tact your local Sym an tec office or  
represen tative.  
Technical support  
Sym an tec offers an array of tech n ical support option s design ed for your  
in dividual n eeds to h elp you get th e m ost out of your software  
in vestm en t.  
W or ld W id e W eb  
Th e Sym an tec World Wide Web site (h ttp://service.sym an tec.com ) is th e  
doorway to a set of on lin e tech n ical support solution s wh ere you will  
fin d th e followin g services:  
In teractive problem solver: Sym an tecs on lin e in teractive problem  
solver (kn own as th e Support Gen ie) h elps you solve problem s an d  
an swer question s about m an y Sym an tec products.  
Product kn owledgebases: Product kn owledgebases en able you to  
search th ousan ds of docum en ts used by Sym an tec Support  
Tech n ician s to an swer custom er question s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-18  
Symantec Service and Support Solutions  
FAQs: Frequen tly Asked Question s docum en ts, also kn own as FAQs,  
list com m on ly asked question s an d clear an swers for specific  
products.  
Discussion groups: Discussion groups provide a forum wh ere you can  
ask question s an d receive an swers from Sym an tec on lin e support  
tech n ician s.  
FTP: Poin t your Web browser to h ttp://service.sym an tec.com to  
search for an d down load tech n ical n otes an d software updates. You  
can also click th e LiveUpdate button in program s en abled with th is  
feature to autom atically down load an d in stall software updates an d  
virus defin ition s.  
Oth er Sym an tec support option s in clude th e followin g:  
Am erica On lin e  
Com puServe  
Type Keyword: SYMANTEC to access th e  
Sym an tec forum .  
Type GO SYMANTEC to access th e Sym an tec  
forum .  
Sym an tec BBS  
Set your m odem to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, n o  
parity an d dial (541) 484-6669.  
Autom ated fax  
retrieval system  
To receive gen eral product in form ation , fact  
sh eets an d product upgrade order form s  
directly to your fax m ach in e, please call our  
Custom er Service fax retrieval system at (800)  
554-4403 or (541) 984-2490.  
For tech n ical application n otes, please call our  
Tech n ical Support fax retrieval system at (541)  
984-2490 an d select option 2.  
Stan dardCare  
Support  
If you can t access th e In tern et, take advan tage  
of your 90 days of free teleph on e tech n ical  
support (from th e date of your first call) at n o  
ch arge to all registered users of Sym an tec  
software. Call (541) 465 8420.  
PriorityCare an d  
Platin um Care  
Support  
Expan ded teleph on e support services available  
to all registered custom ers. For com plete  
in form ation , please call our autom ated fax  
retrieval service, located in th e Un ited States,  
at (800) 554-4403 or (541) 984-2490, an d  
request docum en t 070, or visit our website:  
www.sym an tec.com /tech supp/telesupp.h tm l  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symantec Service and Support Solutions  
B-19  
Su p p or t for old a n d d iscon t in u ed ver sion s  
Wh en a n ew version of th is software is released, registered users will  
receive upgrade in form ation in th e m ail. Teleph on e support will be  
provided for th e previous version for six m on th s after th e release of th e  
n ew version . Tech n ical in form ation m ay still be available th rough on lin e  
support.  
Wh en Sym an tec an n oun ces th at a product will n o lon ger be m arketed or  
sold, teleph on e support will be discon tin ued 60 days later. Support will  
on ly be available for discon tin ued products th rough on lin e services. See  
th e section “Tech n ical support” for on lin e service option s.  
Customer Service  
Sym an tecs Custom er Service departm en t can assist you with n on -  
tech n ical question s. Call Custom er Service to:  
Order an upgrade.  
Subscribe to th e Sym an tec Support Solution of your ch oice.  
Fulfill your request for product literature or dem on stration disks.  
Fin d out about dealers an d con sultan ts in your area.  
Replace m issin g or defective CDs, disks, m an uals, etc.  
Update your product registration with address or n am e ch an ges.  
You can also visit Custom er Service on lin e at at our website  
www.sym an tec.com /custserv for th e latest Custom er Service FAQs, to  
fin d out th e status of your order or return , or to post a query to a  
Custom er Service discussion group.  
Worldwide Service and Support  
Sym an tec provides Tech n ical Support an d Custom er Service worldwide.  
Services vary by coun try an d in clude In tern ation al Partn ers wh o  
represen t Sym an tec in region s with out a Sym an tec office. For gen eral  
in form ation , please con tact th e Sym an tec Service an d Support Office for  
your region .  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-20  
Symantec Service and Support Solutions  
NORTH AMERICA  
Sym an tec Corporation  
175 W. Broadway  
Eugen e, OR, 97401  
(800) 441-7234 (USA & Can ada)  
(541) 334-6054 (all oth er location s)  
Fax: (541) 984-8020  
Autom ated Fax Retrieval  
(800) 554-4403  
(541) 984-2490  
BRAZIL  
Sym an tec Brazil  
Av. Juruce, 302 - cj 11  
São Paulo - SP  
04080 011  
+55 (11) 5561 0284  
Fax: +55 (11) 5530 8869  
Brazil  
EUROPE  
Sym an tec Europe Ltd.  
Kan aalpark 145  
+31 (71) 535 3111  
Fax: +31 (71) 535 3150  
2321 JV Leiden  
Th e Neth erlan ds  
Autom ated Fax Retrieval  
+31 (71) 535 3255  
ASIA/PACIFIC RIM  
Sym an tec Australia Pty. Ltd. +61 (2) 9850 1000  
408 Victoria Road  
Gladesville, NSW 2111  
Australia  
Fax: +61 (2) 9850 1001  
+61 (2) 9817 4550  
Autom ated Fax Retrieval  
Most In tern ation al Partn ers provide Custom er Service an d Tech n ical  
Support for Sym an tec products in your local lan guage. For m ore  
in form ation on oth er Sym an tec an d In tern ation al Partn er location s,  
please call our Tech n ical Support autom ated fax retrieval service, in th e  
Un ited States at +1 (541) 984-2490, ch oose Option 2, an d request  
docum en t 1400.  
Every effort h as been m ade to en sure th e accuracy of th is in form ation .  
However, th e in form ation con tain ed h erein is subject to ch an ge with out  
n otice. Sym an tec Corporation reserves th e righ t for such ch an ge with out  
prior n otice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Returning a Drive  
B-21  
Returning a Drive  
All oth er coun tries except USA. If your Hewlett-Packard product requires repair  
or replacem en t, call th e HPCustom er Support at th e ph on e n um ber listed in  
Appen dix B: Custom er Support” to receive in struction s.  
In th e USA. If your Hewlett-Packard product requires repair or replacem en t,  
follow th ese in struction s:  
Call th e n um ber listed in Appen dix B: Custom er Support, B-5. Make sure you are  
at your system an d h ave your drive in stalled wh en you call. Custom er Support  
will h elp you determ in e if your drive is defective. Provide th e product type, serial  
n um ber, an d date of purch ase. You will be given a return auth orization n um ber.  
Keep th e return auth orization (RA) n um ber for future referen ce.  
Securely repackage th e product to preven t sh ippin g dam age (use th e origin al  
packagin g, if possible) an d m ark th e return auth orization n um ber on th e box.  
All product return s m ust h ave an accom pan yin g return auth orization n um ber. To  
en sure tim ely an d accurate processin g of your return , th e n um ber m ust be clearly  
prin ted on th e outside of th e box.  
Use th e appropriate address for your location . A traceable sh ippin g m eth od is  
recom m en ded. Th e postage, sh ippin g, an d in suran ce ch arges in curred in sh ippin g  
to Hewlett-Packard will be paid by Purch aser an d all risk for th e product sh all  
rem ain with Purch aser un til such tim e as Hewlett-Packard takes receipt of th e  
product.  
On ce your product is received at Hewlett-Packard, we will sh ip th e replacem en t  
product. Hewlett-Packard will pay sh ippin g ch arges to th e Purch aser for  
replacem en t product covered un der warran ty.  
If th e product is still un der warran ty, th ere is n o ch arge for th e replacem en t. If th e  
product is n ot covered un der warran ty, an exch an ge cost will be quoted wh en th e  
return auth orization n um ber is issued.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto-Protect feature  
disablin g tem porarily  
In d ex  
Win dows 95 14-4, 14-12  
en ablin g  
Win dows 95 14-12, 14-17  
failure to load on startup  
Win dows 95 14-17  
Auto-Protect icon  
Win dows 95 14-3  
AutoSearch 13-2  
A
access tim e 3-4, A-2, A-3, A-4  
accessin g on lin e Help 10-2  
Acer bran d com puter 3-7  
addin g graph ics to in serts 7-6  
adjustin g a ph oto 10-11  
Adobe Acrobat file 10-9  
Adobe Acrobat Reader 10-9  
Adobe System s Web site 10-2  
Advan ced button 10-15  
alerts  
B
backup copies  
in fected 14-10, 14-11, 14-18  
replacin g deleted in fected files 14-11  
bi-direction al parallel port 3-4, A-2  
black-an d-wh ite, con vertin g to 10-9  
boot records  
Win dows 95 14-9  
Allow Multiple Docum en t Win dows com -  
m an d 10-15  
bypassin g scan s of 14-8  
un able to repair  
Win dows 95 14-12  
bootin g  
an n otatin g  
docum en ts 13-3  
application software  
Auto-Protect failure to load after 14-17  
from Em ergen cy Boot Disk  
in stallin g 1-8–1-12  
un in stallin g 1-12–1-13  
application s  
im proper operation after repair 14-18  
arran gin g track titles 7-6  
assign in g drive letter 3-5–3-6  
audio cable  
irreparable m aster boot record 14-12  
buffer size A-4  
buffer un derrun 3-4–3-5  
bypassin g boot record scan s 14-8  
con n ectin g 1-7  
discon n ectin g 1-14  
Audio CD Layout win dow 6-3  
audio CDs  
track-at-on ce m ode 8-1  
audio con n ector 1-7  
audio distortion 3-3–3-4, A-4  
audio tracks 6-2  
C
cabin ets  
closin g 13-10  
creatin g 13-6  
cables  
audio 1-7, 1-14  
data 1-6, 1-14  
power 1-2  
com bin ed with wave files 6-7  
pre-recordin g to wave files 6-5  
recordin g 6-3  
prin ter 1-5, 1-15  
can celin g an action 10-12  
autom atic protection of files 9-4  
In dex-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-2  
capacity, CD A-4  
CD Copier  
supported by CD-Writer drive A-3  
write-on ce 2-3, 3-5, A-3  
CD-Writer drive  
ch an gin g tem p directory location 8-4  
disc copy option 8-4  
On lin e Help 8-4  
selectin g destin ation drive 8-3  
selectin g source drive 8-3  
startin g 8-2  
audio cable 1-7, 1-14  
ch an gin g drive letter 3-5–3-6  
com patibility problem s 3-7  
con n ectin g 1-1–1-15  
con n ectin g to an oth er com puter 1-13, 1-  
15  
test option s 8-3  
types of CDs th at can be copied 8-1  
CD layout  
Custom er Support B-2  
data cable 1-6, 1-14  
about 6-3  
dim en sion s A-4  
ch an gin g son g order 6-7  
m odifyin g 6-7  
discon n ectin g 1-13–1-15  
driver files 3-8  
open in g 6-8  
in stallin g application software 1-8–1-12  
m odel n um ber B-3  
rem ovin g son gs 6-7  
ren am in g son gs 6-8  
savin g 6-8  
n ot recogn ized 3-5–3-6  
optim izin g perform an ce 3-6–3-7, A-3  
package con ten ts 1-1  
perform an ce A-2–A-3, A-4  
perform an ce en h an cem en t 3-4  
power supply 1-2  
CD-DA 6-1  
CD-ROM  
clean in g discs 2-4  
CD-ROM drive  
ch an gin g drive letter 3-5–3-6  
power switch 1-3, 1-14  
prin ter cable 1-15  
iden tifyin g B-4  
iden tifyin g drive letter 2-4  
problem readin g CDs 3-5  
SCSI 2 3-3  
return in g 21  
selectin g CDs 2-2–2-3  
serial n um ber B-3  
CD-ROM drives  
recordin g audio 6-4  
CD-ROM XA 8-2  
CDs  
sh arin g parallel port with prin ter 1-4–1-5,  
3-3  
supported discs A-3  
system requirem en ts A-1  
usin g earph on es or speakers 3-3  
ch an ged files, protection of 9-13  
ch an gin g son g order 6-7  
ch an gin g text attributes 7-6  
clean in g CD-Writer drive 2-4  
Clip art 10-6  
can n ot fin d CD 3-5–3-6  
capacity A-4  
clean in g discs 2-4  
copy preven tion feature 3-3  
in sertin g 2-1–2-2  
m ain ten an ce 2-4  
m ulti-session 3-5  
closin g  
m usic 1-7  
cabin ets 13-10  
power loss wh ile writin g 3-6  
problem s in sertin g 2-2  
purch asin g 2-3  
readin g problem 3-5  
rem ovin g 2-2  
closin g tray 2-1  
Clue cards 10-3, 10-11  
collage. See layers 10-15  
com patibility A-1  
com patibility problem s 3-7  
com patible parallel port 3-4, A-2  
rewritable 2-2, 2-3, A-3  
selectin g 2-2–2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-3  
com pressed files  
m istakes 10-12  
creatin g  
file exten sion 14-11  
repairin g  
Win dows 95 14-12  
an n otation s 13-3  
cabin ets 13-6  
drawers 13-7, 13-8  
folders 13-7, 13-8  
Sticky Note an n otation s 13-4  
creatin g a protection list 9-3  
creatin g audio CDs 6-4  
croppin g  
scan n in g down loaded  
Win dows 95 14-2  
com pression software 3-6  
com puter  
iden tifyin g m odel B-3  
processor speed A-1, A-2  
system requirem en ts A-1  
con n ectin g  
docum en ts 13-3  
CTRL-ALT-DEL 3-6  
Custom er Service B-19  
Custom er Support, con tactin g B-2  
custom izin g  
audio cable 1-7  
CD-Writer drive 1-1–1-15  
CD-Writer drive to an oth er com puter 1-  
13, 1-15  
data cable 1-6  
power cord 1-2  
Norton An tiVirus  
Win dows 95 14-7  
custom izin g jewel case in serts 7-2  
cyclin g power 1-8, 1-10, 3-1  
con n ector  
audio 1-7  
parallel port 1-4, 1-6  
prin ter port 1-4  
D
con tactin g Custom er Support B-2  
con ten ts, package 1-1  
Con tin ue action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
con trol pan el for HP Sim ple Trax 9-11  
copy preven tion feature 3-3  
copyin g  
data cable  
con n ectin g 1-6  
discon n ectin g 1-14  
defin in g text attributes 7-5  
Delete action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
deletin g in fected files  
procedure  
audio CDs 8-1  
CD Extra discs 8-2  
DirectCD discs 8-2  
drawers 13-6  
m ixed-m ode CDs 8-2  
ph oto CDs 8-2  
Win dows 95 14-11  
wh en an d wh y  
Win dows 95 14-10  
desktop publish in g, preparin g ph oto for 10-9  
Device Man ager 1-10, 3-5, A-1, B-3, B-4  
digital audio extraction 6-4  
dim en sion s A-4  
video CDs 8-2  
copyin g CDs  
m akin g m ulitple copies 8-3  
steps 8-3  
copyin g from CD to CD 3-3  
copyrigh t n otice 6-2, 8-1  
Corel Fam ily & Frien ds 11-10  
Corel Ph oto House 2 11-7  
Corel Prin t House 3 11-3  
Corel Prin t House Magic 11-1  
correctin g  
Direct CD 3-5  
DirectCD 5-2  
On lin e Help 5-4  
startin g 5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-4  
DirectCD discs  
about form attin g CD-RW disc 5-2  
E
addin g data 5-3  
ejectin g 5-3  
form attin g 5-2  
earph on es 3-3  
Easy-CD Audio  
On lin e Help 6-9  
disablin g  
virus protection  
Win dows 95 14-4, 14-12  
disc labels  
startin g 6-1  
wizard 6-2  
EasyPh oto Organ izer. See ph oto organ izer  
effects. see Effects in online Help  
eject button 2-1, 2-2  
prin tin g 7-8  
discon n ectin g  
ejectin g DirectCD discs 5-3  
em ail 3-4  
audio cable 1-14  
CD-Writer drive 1-13–1-15  
data cable 1-14  
Em ergen cy Boot Disk  
bootin g from  
prin ter cable 1-15  
displayin g  
irreparable m aster boot record 14-12  
failure to boot from 14-18  
en ablin g virus protection  
Win dows 95 14-12, 14-17  
en viron m en tal specification s A-5  
EPS file form at 10-9  
erasin g files on CDs 5-4  
error logs tab in HP Sim ple Trax 9-14  
error m essage  
grids 7-4  
track n um bers 7-7  
track tim es 7-7  
distortion  
audio 3-3–3-4  
video 3-4  
docum en ts  
an n otatin g 13-3  
croppin g 13-3  
faxin g 13-5  
buffer un derrun 3-4–3-5  
can n ot fin d CD 3-5–3-6  
CD n ot recogn ized 1-11  
un able to read 3-5  
filin g 13-9  
n am in g 13-9  
prin tin g 13-6  
scan n in g 13-9  
viewin g 13-3  
error rate A-4  
Exclude action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
explorin g advan ced features 10-14, 10-15  
Export button 10-9  
drawers  
copyin g in to cabin ets 13-6  
creatin g 13-7  
custom izin g 13-7  
exportin g a ph oto.See also Sen din g a ph oto  
10-9  
drive letter  
ch an gin g 3-5–3-6  
iden tifyin g 2-4  
drivers  
F
fin din g 3-8  
drives, scan n in g  
FAQs B-18  
fax m odem 3-4  
faxin g 13-5  
Win dows 95 14-6  
file exten sion s  
in fected files 14-11  
file form ats  
sen din g to 10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-5  
files  
H
autom atic protection 9-4  
ch an ged, protection of 9-13  
filters 9-10  
protected version s of 9-8  
protection h istory 9-8  
protection of 9-2  
h ard drive  
access tim e 3-4, A-2, A-3, A-4  
com pression software 3-6  
Maxtor bran d 3-7  
speed A-2  
storage requirem en ts A-1  
tran sfer rate A-1, A-2  
retrievin g 9-6  
scan n in g in dividual  
Win dows 95 14-6  
Help  
filin g  
CD Copier 8-4  
docum en ts 13-9  
Fin d Device Autom atically option  
Win dows 95 14-15  
DirectCD 5-4  
Easy-CD Audio 6-9  
jewel case in serts 7-8  
fin din g in HP Sim ple Trax 9-9  
firm ware version B-3  
fittin g tracks on a page 7-7  
fixin g a ph oto 10-11  
floppy disks  
h elp. See on lin e Help  
h igh -pressure air 2-4  
h istory of protection for a file 9-8  
HP Sim ple Trax  
con trol pan el 9-11  
scan n in g  
error logs tab 9-14  
protectin g files 9-2  
protection list 9-3  
Win dows 95 14-6  
un able to repair boot record  
retrievin g protected files 9-6  
sch edule setup tab 9-13  
sch edulin g a protection session 9-4  
selection tab 9-12  
Win dows 95 14-13  
virus defin ition s update disk B-17  
folders  
creatin g 13-7  
custom izin g 13-7  
scan n in g in dividual  
HP VersaWriter CD drive  
iden tifyin g drive letter 2-4  
un in stallin g 1-12–1-13  
h um idity specification s A-5  
Win dows 95 14-6  
form attin g DirectCD discs 5-2  
FTP site B-18  
I
G
I/O ch an n el settin g 3-7, A-1  
IBM Aptiva bran d com puter 3-7  
in dexed color 10-9  
galleries 10-6  
Get Ph oto button 10-5  
GIF file form at 10-9  
guided activities 10-3  
in fected files  
types of file exten sion s 14-11  
un able to repair  
Win dows 95 14-11–14-13  
In oculate action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-6  
in oculation ch an ges, expected vs. un expect-  
ed  
L
Win dows 95 14-10  
learn in g Ph otoDeluxe 10-2  
listen in g to m usic CDs 1-7  
LiveUpdate button B-18  
LiveUpdates  
in sertin g a CD 2-1–2-2  
in sertin g objects 7-6  
in stallin g  
Norton An tiVirus for Win dows 95  
obtain in g  
system requirem en ts 14-3  
software program s, disablin g Auto-Pro-  
tect 14-4  
wh en un able to repair files 14-11  
Win dows 95 procedure 14-14–14-16  
sch edulin g  
updated virus defin ition s  
Win dows 95 14-15  
updatin g virus protection with out  
Win dows 95 14-16  
Win dows 95 14-16  
in stallin g application software 1-8–1-12  
in stallin g parallel driver files 3-8  
In telligen t Updater  
Lon g Men us com m an d 10-15  
Win dows 95 14-16  
In tern et  
obtain in g LiveUpdates  
M
Win dows 95 14-14  
Sym an tec World Wide Web site B-17–B-  
18  
m agn ifyin g 10-4  
m ailed virus protection updates  
Win dows 95 14-16  
m ain ten an ce 2-4  
in tro tabs 10-3  
IRQ settin g A-1, A-3  
m akin g a disc copy 8-4  
m akin g m ultiple copies 8-3  
m aster boot record  
J
Win dows 95 14-12  
Maxtor bran d h ard drive 3-7  
m easurin g in serts an d objects 7-3  
m em ory A-1, A-2, B-3  
n eeded for a ph oto 10-3  
m istakes 10-12  
m odel n um ber, locatin g B-3  
m odem , obtain in g LiveUpdates  
Win dows 95 14-14  
m odifyin g CD layouts 6-7  
More Touch Up tab 10-11  
m ovin g CD-Writer drive to an oth er com puter  
1-15  
MSCDEX version 3-5  
m ulti-session CD 3-5  
m usic CDs 1-7  
jewel case in serts  
addin g graph ics 7-6  
editin g 7-2  
editin g text 7-6  
graph ics  
OLE objects 7-6  
m akin g 7-2  
On lin e Help 7-8  
position in g 7-4  
prin tin g 7-8  
rulers an d grids, usin g 7-3  
viewin g 7-2  
zoom in g 7-3  
jewel case layout 7-2  
Page m en u 7-3  
JPEG file form at 10-8  
playin g 6-8  
My Ph otos gallery 10-6  
storin g a ph oto in 10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-7  
con flictin g device 1-10–1-11, 1-11, 1-12,  
A-3  
N
con n ector 1-4, 1-6  
ECP 1-10, 3-5, A-2  
EPP 1-10, 3-5, A-2  
m in im um requirem en ts A-1  
sh arin g 1-4–1-5, 3-3  
n am in g docum en ts 13-9  
n etworks 3-4  
Norton An tiVirus for Win dows 95  
autom atic features 14-2  
custom izin g 14-7  
SPP 3-4, A-2  
in stallin g  
PDF file form at. See Adobe Acrobat file  
perform an ce A-2–A-3, A-4  
optim izin g 3-6–3-7, A-3  
ph oto organ izer 10-4, 10-7  
ph oto win dow  
system requirem en ts 14-3  
startin g 14-4  
Norton An tiVirus win dow  
Win dows 95 14-4  
open in g m ore th an on e 10-15  
playin g m usic CDs 6-8  
position in g objects 7-4  
power cord  
O
con n ectin g 1-2  
Object-order m en u button 10-4  
OLE objects 7-6  
on lin e Help 10-2  
button location s 10-3  
on lin e h elp, Norton An tiVirus  
Win dows 95 14-5  
open in g CD layouts 6-8  
open in g Norton An tiVirus win dow  
Win dows 95 14-4  
open in g tray 2-1  
operatin g system  
com patible A-1  
iden tifyin g version B-3  
operatin g system s  
power loss wh ile writin g 3-6  
power m an agem en t feature 3-2, 3-4  
power requirem en ts A-5  
power supply 1-2  
ligh t 1-2, 1-12  
power switch 1-3, 1-14  
power-savin g m ode 1-3, 1-14  
problem s 1-12  
un pluggin g 1-14  
power switch 1-3, 1-14  
power-savin g m ode 1-3, 1-14  
preparin g a ph oto. see sen din g a ph oto  
Prin t Preview 10-10  
prin ter  
m ultiple in stalled  
com patibility problem s 3-8  
m on itor software 3-7  
problem s 1-11  
Win dows 95 14-19  
sh arin g parallel port with CD-Writer  
drive 1-4–1-5, 3-3  
prin ter cable  
P
con n ectin g 1-5  
discon n ectin g 1-15  
package con ten ts 1-1  
Page m en u 7-3  
Page Setup 10-10  
parallel port A-5, B-4  
com patible 3-4, A-2  
con figuration 1-10, A-1  
prin ter m on itor software 3-7  
prin ter port con n ector 1-4  
prin ter status m on itor software 3-5, 3-7, 3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-8  
prin tin g 1-5, 10-10–10-11  
disc labels 7-8  
ren am in g son gs in CD layout 6-8  
Repair action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
Repair Wizard  
jewel case in serts 7-8  
problem s 1-11  
wh ile playin g audio CDs 3-3  
prin tin g docum en ts 13-6  
problem s  
Win dows 95 14-9  
repairin g in fected files  
com pressed  
solvin g 10-2  
Problem s Foun d dialog  
Win dows 95 14-9  
processor speed A-1, A-2  
product certification vi  
product kn owledgebases B-17  
program s  
un in stallin g 1-12–1-13  
protectin g  
Win dows 95 14-12  
Repair action button  
Win dows 95 14-10  
un successful  
Win dows 95 14-11–14-13  
Win dows NT 14-18  
Rescue Disks  
creatin g  
autom atically 9-4  
ch an ged files 9-13  
defin ition of 9-1  
files 9-2  
sch edule for 9-4  
Win dows 95 14-7  
resizin g  
text 10-14  
retrievin g  
option s 9-7  
protection list, addin g files to 9-3  
protection , files h istory of 9-8  
purch asin g CDs 2-3  
protected files 9-6  
return in g a CD-Writer drive 21  
revertin g 10-12  
rewritable CDs 2-2, 2-3, 3-5, A-3  
ruler option 7-4  
R
RAM. See m em ory  
readin g error 3-5  
S
readin g from CD  
speed A-2, A-4  
recordin g  
Sam ple Ph otos gallery 10-6  
savin g a ph oto 10-7–10-8  
savin g CD layout 6-8  
scan n in g  
CD to CD 3-3  
power loss durin g 3-6  
wh ile run n in g oth er application s 3-4  
recordin g audio tracks 6-3  
recordin g wave files 6-4  
reducin g. See also m agn ifyin g, resizin g 10-4  
refresh in g th e screen 1-11, 3-5  
rem ovin g a CD 2-2  
drives  
Win dows 95 14-6  
in dividual item s  
Win dows 95 14-6  
scan n in g docum en ts 13-9  
scan s  
sch edulin g  
rem ovin g son gs from CD layout 6-7  
rem ovin g viruses  
Win dows 95 14-6–14-7  
deletin g in fected files  
Win dows 95 14-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-9  
sch edulin g  
Sticky Note an n otation s 13-4  
Stop action button  
LiveUpdates  
Win dows 95 14-10  
Support Gen ie B-17  
support solution s B-17–B-20  
switch box 1-10, 1-13, 3-2  
Sym an tec World Wide Web site B-17–B-18  
system files  
Win dows 95 14-15  
protection session 9-4  
scan s  
Win dows 95 14-6–14-7  
setup tab in HP Sim ple Trax 9-13  
search in g in HP Sim ple Trax 9-9  
selection tab in HP Sim ple Trax 9-12  
Sen d button 10-8–10-9  
un able to repair  
Win dows 95 14-13  
system requirem en ts A-1  
sen din g a ph oto 10-8  
serial n um ber B-3  
service solution s B-17–B-20  
sh arin g parallel port 1-4–1-5, 3-3  
Sim ple Trax. See HP Sim ple Trax  
size 10-10  
T
tech n ical docum en ts 10-2  
tech n ical support B-17  
tem p directory  
ch an gin g location 8-4  
tem perature specification s A-5  
test option s  
CD Copier 8-3  
text 10-14  
text attributes  
sn appin g objects to grid 7-4  
software  
disablin g virus protection wh en in stall-  
in g  
Win dows 95 14-4  
in stallin g 1-8–1-12  
un in stallin g 1-12–1-13  
software com pression 3-6  
Software In stallation CD  
driver files 3-8  
ch an gin g 7-6  
defin in g 7-5  
son gs  
TIFF file form at 10-8, 10-9  
Touch Up tab 10-11  
touch in g up a ph oto 10-11  
tour m ovie 10-2  
track colum n lists 7-7  
track titles  
arran gin g 7-6  
track-at-on ce m ode 8-1  
tracks  
com bin in g with wave files 6-2  
tran sfer rate A-1, A-2, A-4  
Trash Can button 10-4  
tray, open in g an d closin g 2-1  
troublesh ootin g 10-2  
audio distortion 3-3–3-4  
cable con n ection s 1-8, 1-9–1-10, 3-1–3-2  
com patibility problem s 3-7  
copyin g from CD to CD 3-3  
Custom er Support B-2  
rem ovin g from CD layout 6-7  
ren am in g 6-8  
soun d board 1-7, 3-3, B-4  
soun d system 1-7  
soun d-m utin g feature 3-3  
speakers 3-3  
special effects. see Effects in online Help  
speed  
readin g from CD A-2, A-4  
writin g to CD 3-5, A-2, A-4  
Start m en u, accessin g Norton An tiVirus  
Win dows 95 14-4  
startin g  
Norton An tiVirus  
Win dows 95 14-4  
startin g Ph otoDeluxe 10-1  
status bar 10-3  
step-by-step tabs 10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-10  
h ardware con n ection s 1-8, 1-9–1-10, 3-1–  
3-2  
Win dows 95 14-9  
Win dows NT 14-9  
in sertin g CDs 2-2  
virus defin ition s  
IRQ con flict A-3  
in stallin g latest 14-16  
virus defin ition s update disk B-17  
virus protection  
n ot recogn izin g CD-Writer drive 1-12  
parallel port con figuration 1-10–1-11, 1-  
11, 1-12, A-3  
disablin g  
power supply 1-12  
prin tin g 1-11, 3-8  
readin g error 3-5  
return in g your CD-Writer drive 21  
video distortion 3-4  
Win dows 95 14-4, 14-12  
en ablin g  
Win dows 95 14-12, 14-17  
keepin g curren t  
Win dows 95 14-14  
Norton An tiVirus features  
Win dows 95 14-2  
updatin g  
Win dows NT 14-17  
writin g to CD 3-4  
tutorial 13-11  
Type Text tool 13-4  
type. See text  
with out LiveUpdate 14-16  
user respon sibilities  
types of CDs th at can be copied 8-1  
typin g text 13-4  
Win dows 95 14-2–14-3  
viruses  
con stan t release of n ew 14-2–14-3  
volum e con trol 3-3  
U
un com pressin g files for repair  
Win dows 95 14-12  
Un do button 10-4, 10-12  
un in stallin g 1-12–1-13  
updatin g  
W
wave files 3-4, 6-2  
com bin in g with audio tracks 6-2  
pre-recordin g from audio tracks 6-5  
recordin g 6-4  
virus protection  
Win dows 95 14-2–14-3  
with out LiveUpdate 14-16  
specification s 6-4  
usin g th e ph oto organ izer 10-6  
web site, Sym an tec B-17–B-18  
Win dows 95  
irreparable system files 14-13  
win dows explorer 6-3  
wizard 5-2  
V
DirectCD 5-2  
m akin g m usic CDs 6-2  
World Wide Web  
vibration specification s A-5  
video card 3-4  
Adobe System s Web site 10-2  
Worldwide Service an d Support B-19–B-20  
write-on ce CDs 2-3, 3-4, 3-5, A-3  
writin g to CD 3-3, 3-4  
power loss 3-6  
video distortion 3-4  
viewin g docum en ts 13-3  
viewin g jewel case in serts 7-2  
viewin g protected version s 9-8  
virus alerts  
speed 3-5, A-2, A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In dex-11  
Z
Zoom In button 10-4  
Zoom m en u 10-4  
Zoom Out button 10-4  
Zoom tool 10-4  
ENGLISH EXTERNAL USER’S GUIDE  
HP PART NO. C4381-90100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Inc Paint Sprayer 208 644 User Manual
Havis Shields Automobile Accessories C TCB LOCK User Manual
Honeywell Humidifier HEV 312 User Manual
HTC PDAs Smartphones HTC P4350 User Manual
Hunter Fan Air Cleaner 30849 User Manual
IBM Computer Hardware WL2 User Manual
IBM Computer Monitor L170m User Manual
IBM Switch ZG09 0629 User Manual
Ikelite Camera Accessories E 900 User Manual
Impex Home Gym DBR 400 User Manual